DVP PLC Application Examples Of Programming(CURVE) EXEMPLOS_DE_APLICACAO CLP_DVP EXEMPLOS DE APLICACAO CLP

User Manual: EXEMPLOS_DE_APLICACAO-CLP_DVP

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 267

DownloadDVP-PLC Application Examples Of Programming(CURVE) EXEMPLOS_DE_APLICACAO-CLP_DVP EXEMPLOS DE APLICACAO-CLP DVP
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Foreword
I ndustrial

Automation Business Unit (IABU) of Delta Electronics focuses our
expertise on "Drive, Motion and Control" with our knowledge and experience in
automation control. Our R&D teams continue researching and developing key
technologies, producing innovative products in industrial automation; for example many
OEM’s use our automation products for processing machines used in the food industry,
textile industry, chemical industry, electronics industry, metal industry and plastic
industry. Our automation equipment is also used in the pharmaceutical industry, printing
industry, as well as for energy saving air-conditioning and water treatment facilities. In
recent years, we have integrated our industrial automation products, developed
industrial control networks, and offered integration services to our clients around the
world.
Delta's DVP series high-speed, stable and highly reliable PLCs are applied in various
automation machines. In addition to its fast logic operations, abundant instructions,
various extension cards and cost-effectiveness, DVP series PLCs support many
communication protocols, seamlessly integrating the industrial automation control
system as a whole.
To meet users’ needs for DVP-PLC programming examples, we provide examples of
basic instructions including sequential/position control, timed counting and input/output
control in DVP-PLC Application Examples. In addition, in this manual we also provides
examples of advanced instructions including elementary arithmetic operations, data
processing, high speed input/output control, network connection, and PLC
communication(AC motor drive / temperature controller / servo motor). DVP-PLC
Application Examples includes most common applications in automation control, such
as parking lot entry/exit control, material mixing, stock monitoring, level monitoring,
traffic lights control, and conveyer belt control. This manual explains methods for
applying basic instructions as well as advanced instructions of DVP-PLC to accomplish
the field application purposes. Users can easily understand how DVP-PLC features in
automation applications through this manual. By referring to our DVP-PLC Application
Manual- 【 Programming 】 , users can also apply DVP-PLC efficiently on particular
purposes and fulfill various control requirements in industrial automation.

DVP-PLC Application Examples
CONTENTS

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.1 Normally Closed Contact in Series Connection ........................................ 1-1
1.2 Block in Parallel Connection ................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Rising-edge Pulse Output for One Scan Cycle......................................... 1-3
1.4 Falling-edge Pulse Output for One Scan Cycle ........................................ 1-4
1.5 Latching Control Circuit.......................................................................... 1-5
1.6 Interlock Control Circuit ......................................................................... 1-6
1.7 Automatic Parameter Initialization When Powered Up .............................. 1-7
1.8 Common Latched Circuit and SET/RST Instructions Application ............... 1-8
1.9 SET/RST - Latched and Unlatched Circuit ............................................... 1-9
1.10 Alternate Output Circuit (With Latched Function) ................................... 1-10
1.11 Conditional Control Circuit .................................................................... 1-12
1.12 First-in Priority Circuit .......................................................................... 1-13
1.13 Last-in Priority Circuit .......................................................................... 1-15
1.14 Entry/Exit Control of the Underground Car Park..................................... 1-16
1.15 Forward/Reverse Control for the Three-Phase Asynchronous Motor ....... 1-18
1.16 Selective Execution of Programs .......................................................... 1-19
1.17 MC/MCR - Manual/Auto Control ............................................................ 1-21
1.18 STL Manual/Auto Control...................................................................... 1-24

2. Counter Design Examples
2.1 Product Mass Packaging ........................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Daily Production Record (16-bit Counting Up Latched Counter)................ 2-2
2.3 Products Amount Calculation (32-bit Counting Up/Down Counter) ............ 2-4
2.4 24-hour Clock Operated by 3 Counters ................................................... 2-5

i

2.5 A B-phase Pulse High-speed Counter ..................................................... 2-6

3. Timer Design Examples
3.1 Delay OFF Program ............................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Delay ON Program ................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 Delay ON/OFF Program ......................................................................... 3-3
3.4 Sequential Delay Output (Starting 3 Motors Sequentially) ........................ 3-4
3.5 Pulse-Width Modulation ......................................................................... 3-6
3.6 Artificial Fishpond Water Level Monitoring System (Flashing Circuit) ........ 3-7
3.7 Burn-in Test System (Timing Extension) .................................................. 3-9
3.8 Star-Delta Reduced Voltage Starter Control ............................................. 3-11
3.9 Automatic Door Control .......................................................................... 3-13
3.10 Automatic Liquids Mixing Control System .............................................. 3-15
3.11 Automatic Coffee Maker........................................................................ 3-17
3.12 Automatic Urinal Flushing Control Program ........................................... 3-19
3.13 Performing Accumulative Function with Normal Timer ............................ 3-21
3.14 Performing Teaching Function with Normal Timer .................................. 3-23
3.15 Auto Interruption Timer......................................................................... 3-25
3.16 Interesting Fountain ............................................................................. 3-27
3.17 Traffic Lights Control ............................................................................ 3-29

4. Index Registers E, F Design Examples
4.1 Summation of Continuous D Registers .................................................... 4-1
4.2 Parameter Setting for Product Recipe ..................................................... 4-3
4.3 Controlling Voltage Output of 2 DVP-04DA by 8 VRs (Variable Resistors) . 4-5

5. Loop Instruction Design Examples
5.1 Recipe Setting by CJ Instruction ............................................................. 5-1
5.2 Reservoir Level Control .......................................................................... 5-3
5.3 Fire Alarm in the Office (Interruption Application) .................................... 5-5
5.4 Auto Lock up System in the Supermarket (FOR ~ NEXT) ......................... 5-7

ii

6. Data Transmission and Comparison Design Examples
6.1 CMP - Material Mixing Machine .............................................................. 6-1
6.2 ZCP - Water Level Alarm Control ............................................................ 6-3
6.3 BMOV - Multiple History Data Backup ..................................................... 6-4
6.4 FMOV - Single Data Broadcasting .......................................................... 6-5
6.5 CML - Color Lights Flashing ................................................................... 6-7
6.6 XCH - Exchanging the Upper and Lower 8 bits in a Register .................... 6-8
6.7 DIP Switch Input and 7-segment Display Output ...................................... 6-9

7. Elementary Arithmetic Operations Design Examples
7.1 Accurate Pipe Flow Measurement ........................................................... 7-1
7.2 INC/DEC - Fine Tuning by JOG Control................................................... 7-3
7.3 NEG - Displacement Reverse Control ..................................................... 7-5

8. Rotation and Shift Design Examples
8.1 ROL/ROR - Neon Lamp Design .............................................................. 8-1
8.2 SFTL - Defective Product Detect............................................................. 8-3
8.3 WSFL - Automatic Sorting Mixed Products .............................................. 8-5
8.4 SFWR/SFRD - Room Service Call Control ............................................... 8-8

9. Data Processing Design Examples
9.1 ENCO/DECO - Encoding and Decoding................................................... 9-1
9.2 SUM/BON - Checking and Counting the Number of “1” ............................ 9-3
9.3 MEAN/SQR - Mean Value and Square Root............................................. 9-4
9.4 MEMR/MEMW - File Register Access ...................................................... 9-5
9.5 ANS/ANR - Level Monitoring Alarm System ............................................. 9-7
9.6 SORT - Sorting Acquired Data ................................................................ 9-8
9.7 SER - Room Temperature Monitoring ...................................................... 9-10

10. High-speed Input/Output Design Examples
10.1 REF/REFF - DI/DO Refreshment and DI Filter Time Setting ................... 10-1
10.2 DHSCS - Cutting Machine Control ........................................................ 10-3
10.3 DHSZ/DHSCR - Multi-segment Coater Control....................................... 10-4

iii

10.4 SPD - Wheel Rotation Speed Measurement ........................................... 10-6
10.5 PLSY - Production Line Control Program............................................... 10-7
10.6 PWM - Sprayer Valve Control Program .................................................. 10-9
10.7 PLSR - Servo Motor Acceleration/Deceleration Control .......................... 10-11

11. Floating Point Operation Design Examples
11.1 Elementary Arithmetic for Integer and Floating Point .............................. 11-1
11.2 Elementary Arithmetic for Floating Point ................................................ 11-4

12. Communication Design Examples
Introduction ................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1 Communication between PLC and Delta VFD-M Series AC Motor Drive .. 12-5
12.2 Communication between PLC and Delta VFD-B Series AC Motor Drive ... 12-8
12.3 Communication between PLC and Delta VFD-V Series AC Motor Drive ... 12-11
12.4 Communication between PLC and Delta ASD-A Series AC Servo Drive ... 12-14
12.5 Communication between PLC and Delta ASD-A Series AC Servo Drive ... 12-18
12.6 Communication between PLC and Delta DTA Temperature Controller ..... 12-22
12.7 Communication between PLC and Delta DTB Temperature Controller ..... 12-25
12.8 PLC LINK 16 Slaves and Read/Write 16 Data (Word) ............................. 12-28
12.9 PLC LINK 32 Slaves and Read/Write 100 Data (Word) ........................... 12-31
12.10 LINK between PLC, Delta AC Motor Drive and AC Servo Drive ............. 12-34
12.11 LINK between PLC, Delta DTA and DTB Temperature Controllers ......... 12-38
12.12 Controlling START/STOP of 2 DVP PLCs through Communication ........ 12-41
12.13 Communication between Delta PLC and Siemens MM420 Frequency Inverter
........................................................................................................ 12-45
12.14 Communication between Delta PLC and Danfoss VLT6000 Series Adjustable
Frequency Drive ................................................................................ 12-50

13. Real Time Calendar Time Design Examples
13.1 TRD/TWR/TCMP - Office Bell Timing Control......................................... 13-1
13.2 TRD/TZCP - Control of Warehouse Automatic Door ............................... 13-3
13.3 HOUR - Control of Switching Motors after a Long Time Running............. 13-6

iv

14. Simple Positioning Design Examples
14.1 Simple positioning Demonstration System of Delta ASDA AC Servo Drive14-1
14.2 Draw DELTA LOGO by 2-axis Synchronous Motion ................................ 14-6

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
15.1 ALT - Auto Blackboard Cleaner ............................................................. 15-1
15.2 RAMP - Ramp Control of Crane ............................................................ 15-3
15.3 INCD - Traffic Lights Control (Incremental Drum Sequencer) .................. 15-6
15.4 ABSD - Adding Materials in Different Intervals (Absolute Drum Sequencer)15-9
15.5 IST - Electroplating Process Auto Control .............................................. 15-12
15.6 FTC - Fuzzy Temperature Control of the Oven ....................................... 15-18
15.7 PID - Oven Temperature Control (Auto-tuning for PID Temperature Control)
.................................................................................................................. 15-22

16. Network Connection Design Examples
16.1 Ethernet Connection ............................................................................ 16-1
16.2 DeviceNet Connection .......................................................................... 16-6
16.3 CANopen Connection ........................................................................... 16-9
16.4 RTU-485 Connection ............................................................................ 16-12

17. Index.....................................................................................17-1

v

vi

1. Basic Program Design Examples

1.1 Normally Closed Contact in Series Connection

Y0
X1
X0

Control Purpose:
z

Detecting the standing bottles on the conveyor and pushing the fallen bottles out

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 = ON when the detected input signal from the bottle-bottom is sheltered.

X1

X1 = ON when the detected input signal from the bottle-neck is sheltered.

Y0

Pneumatic pushing pole

Control Program:
X0

X1

Y0

Program Description:
z

If the bottle on the conveyor belt is upstanding, the input signal from monitoring photocell at both
bottle-bottom and bottle-neck will be detected. In this case, X0 = ON, and X1 = ON. The normally
open (NO) contact X0 will be activated as well as the normally closed (NC) contact X1. Y0 remains
OFF and pneumatic pushing pole will not perform any action.

z

If the bottle from the conveyor belt is down, only the input signal from monitoring photocell at the
bottle-bottom will be detected. In this case, X0 = ON, X1 = OFF. The state of output YO will be ON
because the NO contact X0 activates and the NC contact X1 remains OFF. The pneumatic pushing
pole will push the fallen bottle out of the conveyor belt.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1-1

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.2 Block in Parallel Connection

Y0

X1

X0

Control Purpose:
z

Setting up a lighting system for users to switch on/off the light whether they are at the bottom or
the top of the stairs.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 turns ON when the bottom switch is turned to the right

X1

X1 turns ON when the top switch is turned to the right.

Y1

Stair light

Control Program:
X0

X1
Y0

X0

X1

Program Description:
z

If the states of the bottom switch and the top switch are the same, both ON or OFF, the light will
be ON. If different, one is ON and the other is OFF, the light will be OFF.

z

When the light is OFF, users can turn on the light by changing the state of either top switch at the
bottom switch of the stairs. Likewise, when the light is ON, users can turn off the light by
changing the state of one of the two switches..

1-2

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.3 Rising-edge Pulse Output for One Scan Cycle
Control Purpose:
z

Creating a pulse of one program scan cycle as the condition to trigger the indicator or other devices
when the switch (X0) is turned on.
X0

M10
One scan cycle
Y0

Devices:
Device
X0
M10
Y0

Function
Switch (OFF→ON)
Creating a trigger pulse for one program scan cycle
Indicator

Control Program:
X0
PLS

M10

SET

Y0

M10 turns on for one scan cycle

M10

Program Description:
z

When X0 is turned on (Rising-edge triggered), PLS instruction will be executed, and M10 will
send a pulse for one program scan cycle.

z

When M10 = ON, [SET Y0] instruction will be executed and Y0 will be ON. In this case, the
indicator will be lighted, and other devices will be activated as well.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1-3

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.4 Falling-edge Pulse Output for One Scan Cycle

Y0(Electromagnetic valve)

X0

Control Purpose:
z

Creating a pulse of one program scan cycle as the condition to trigger the electromagnetic valve or
other devices when the switch is turned off.

X0

M10
One scan cycle
Y0

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Switch(ON→OFF)

M10

Creating a trigger pulse for one program scan cycle

Y0

Electromagnetic valve

Control Program:
X0
PLF

M10

RST

Y0

M10 turns on for one scan cycle

M10
Y0 = OFF

Program Description:
z

When X0 is turned on (Falling-edge triggered), PLF instruction will be executed, and M10
will send a pulse for one program scan cycle.

z

When M10 = ON, [RST Y0] instruction will be executed and Y0 will be OFF. In this case, the
electromagnetic valve will be shut down.

1-4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1. Basic Program Design Examples

1.5 Latching Control Circuit

Y0
X0
START

X1
STOP

X2
TEST

Control Purpose:
z

Controlling the running state of the ceiling-fan by pressing START and STOP.

z

Checking if the ceiling-fan is running normally by pressing TEST.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Press START, X0 = ON.

X1

Press STO, X1 = ON.

X2

Press TEST, X2 = ON.

X3

Error signal

Y1

Ceiling-fan motor control signal

Control Program:

X0

X1

X3
Y1

Y1

Error Signal

X2
TEST button

Program Description:
z

Press START lightly and X0 = ON. The ceiling-fan will keep running if no error occurred (X3
= OFF). The action can be practiced by a latching circuit which takes output Y1 as one of the
input condition to keep the fan running even if the START button is not pressed.

z

When STOP is pressed, X1 = ON and Y1 = OFF. The ceiling-fan will stop running.

z

If error occur (X3 = ON), Y1 will be OFF and the ceiling-fan will stop running.

z

When TEST is pressed (X2 = ON), Y1 = ON. The ceiling-fan will start running if no error
occurred (X3 = OFF). On the contrary, when TEST is released, the ceiling-fan will stop
running. The testing function is performed by this process.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1-5

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.6 Interlock Control Circuit

Y1

Y0
X0

X1

Control Purpose:
z

The Entry/Exit of the parking lot is a single lane passage. By controlling the indicators, the program
ensures that only one car can pass through the Entry/Exit so as to prevent car accident between
entering and leaving cars

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Car entering sensor. When a car passes through the sensor, X0 = ON.

X1

Car leaving sensor. When a car passes through the sensor, X1 = ON.

Y0

Entering car indicator(ON means “GO”, OFF means “STOP”)

Y1

Leaving car indicator(ON means “GO”, OFF means “STOP”)

Control Program
X0

X1

Y1
Y0

Entering Indicator

Y1

Leaving Indicator

Y0

Program Description:
z

In the parking lot, there are two indicators individually directing the entering and leaving cars.
By the interlock control circuit, only one indicator will show “GO” signal and the car accident
will thus be prevented.

z

When an entering car draws near the vehicle control barrier, X0 will be ON and so will Y0.
The entering car indicator will show “GO”. At the same time, the leaving car indicator will
show “STOP.” Car entering is allowed but leaving is prohibited in this case.

z

When a leaving car draws near the vehicle control barrier, X1 will be ON and so will Y1. The
leaving car indicator will show “GO” and the entering car indicator will show “STOP.”

1-6

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.7 Automatic Parameter Initialization When Powered Up

X1
Initialization button

Control Purpose:
z

When the machine is powered up, all the parameters will be initialized automatically and the
machine will be ready. Users don’t need to set the parameters manually.

z

Users can initialize parameters by pressing Initialization button at any time when the
machine is running.

Devices:
Device
X1

Function
Initialization button. X1 will be ON when pressed

M1002

Creating a pulse when PLC is powered on

M10

Creating a trigger pulse for one scan cycle

D1120

PLC COM2 communication protocol

D1121

PLC communication address

Y0

Parameter initialization completed signal

Control Program:
X1
PLS

M10

MOV

H86

D1120

MOV

K1

D1121

SET

Y0

M1002
M10

Program Description:
z

When PLC begins running, M1002 will be ON once and create a pulse with the width of one
scan cycle. This action will be executed for just once during the PLC running process and is
generally used to initialize devices such as D (data register), C (counter) and S (step point)

z

By pressing X1, users can initialize parameters at any time during the program running
process, that is, setting PLC Slave ID as No. 1, COM2 communication format as 9600, 7, E,
1 and Y0 to be ON.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1-7

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.8 Common Latched Circuit and SET/RST Instructions Application
Control Purpose:
z

Turn on the switch, the light will be ON; turn off the switch, the light will be OFF.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Switch-on button. X0 will be ON when pressed

X1

Switch-off button. X1 will be ON when pressed

Y0

Indicator

Control Program:
z

Common Latched Circuit
X0

X1
Y0

Y0

z

Latched Circuit for SET/RST Instructions
X0
X1

SET

Y0

RST

Y0

Program Description:
z

In the above examples, when X0 goes from OFF to ON, Y0 will stay in ON state. When X1
goes from OFF to ON, Y1 will stay in OFF state

z

When X0 and X1 are enabled at the same time, it will be “Stop First”, that is, Y1 and the
indicator will be OFF.

1-8

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.9 SET/RST - Latched and Unlatched Circuit

X0
START

X1
STOP

X2

Y0

Control Purpose:
z

Press START, the pump begins to pump out the water; press STOP or when the water is
empty, the pump stops working.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

START button. X0 will be ON when pressed

X1

STOP button. X1 will be ON when pressed

X2

Level detector. X2 will be ON if there is water in the container

M0

Trigger pulse for one scan cycle

Y0

Pump motor

Control Program:
X0

X2

X1
SET

Y0

PLS

M0

RST

Y0

X1
X2
M0

Program Description:
z

X2 will be ON If there is water in the container. When START is pressed, X0 = ON, and SET
instruction will be executed. Y0 will be set, and the pump motor begins pumping the water.

z

There are two situations for stopping the motor. First, when STOP is pressed, X1 = ON. PLS
instruction will be executed and M0 will be ON for one scan cycle. RST instruction will thus
be executed, and Y0 will be reset to stop pumping.

Second, when the water in the

container is empty, X2 will be OFF and PLS instruction will be executed to trigger M0 for
resetting Y0. In this case, the pump motor will stop pumping as well.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1-9

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.10 Alternate Output Circuit (With Latched Function)
Control Purpose:
z

Setting the light ON by pressing the switch for the 1st time, the 3rd time, 5th time, etc.; setting
the light OFF by pressing the switch for the 2nd time, 4th time, 6th time, etc.

z

Restoring the indicator to the state before power off when the device is powered up again.

Devices:
Device
X1

Function
Light switch. X1 will be ON when the button is pressed

M10

Trigger pulse for one scan cycle

M512

If X1 is pressed for odd number of times, M512 ON, M513 = OFF.

M513

If X1 is pressed for even number of times, M512 = OFF, M513 = ON.

Y1

Indicator

Control Program:
X1
M10

M10

PLS

M10

SET

M512

T rigger pulse for one scan cycle

Y1

RST

M513

SET

M513

RST

M512

If X1 is pressed for odd number
of times, M512=ON, M513=OFF

Y1

M512 M513
Y1
Y1

If X1 is pressed for even number
of times, M512=OFF, M513=ON

Y1 will be ON/OFF if X1 is
pressed for odd/even number of times

Program Description:
z

Pressing X1 for the 1st time (or odd number of times):
When the switch X1 is pressed, X1 will be ON and the [PLS M10] instruction will be
executed for triggering M10 to be ON for one scan cycle. In this case, M10 is ON and Y1 is
OFF, SET and RST instructions at line 2 will thus be executed. On the contrary, SET and
RST instructions at line 3 will not be executed due to the open loop of Y1. At line 4, coil Y1 is
ON because of the results of Line 2: M512 is ON and M513 is OFF. When the 2nd scan cycle
is started, SET/RST at both line 2 and line 3 will not be executed because M10 is OFF in this
scan cycle. As a result, the light will be ON until the switch is pressed next time.

z

Pressing X1 for the 2nd time (or even number of times):
When the switch X1 is pressed again, X1 will be ON and M10 will be ON for one scan cycle.
According to the result of pressing X1 for the first time, the state of Y1 has been ON.
SET/RST instructions at line 3 will thus be executed. In addition, SET/RST instructions at

1-10

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1. Basic Program Design Examples
line 2 won’t be executed due to the open loop of Y1. In this case, M513 will be ON and M512
will be OFF. When the 2nd scan cycle is started, SET/RST at both line 2 and line 3 will not be
executed because M10 is OFF in this scan cycle. As a result, the light will remain OFF until
the switch is pressed next time.
z

Alternate output(ON/OFF) function can also be performed by using API 66 ALT instruction

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1-11

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.11 Conditional Control Circuit

X0

Y0

X2

START

STOP

Oil Pump Motor
Oil Pump Motor

X3

X1
START

STOP

Main Motor

Y1

Main Motor

Control Purpose:
z

Providing lube for the gear box before the lathe spindle starts to run which aims to ensure
that the oil pump motor starts first and the main motor starts subsequently.

Devices:
Device

Content

X0

Oil pump START button. X0 will be ON when pressed.

X1

Main motor START button. X0 will be ON when pressed.

X2

Oil pump STOP button. X2 will be ON when pressed.

X3

Main motor STOP button. X3 will be ON when pressed.

Y0

Oil pump motor

Y1

Main motor

Control Program:
X0

X2
Y0

Y0
X1

X3

Y0
Y1

Y1

Program Description:
z

This program is a typical application of the conditional control circuit. Y0 = ON when Oil
Pump START button is pressed. Therefore, the oil pump will start to provide lube for the gear
box of main motor(Y1)

z

Under the precondition of the operating state of the Oil pump, the main motor (Y1) will be
ON when the Main motor START button is pressed.

z

During the operation of main motor (Y1), oil pump (Y0) needs to provide lube continuously.

z

The oil pump will be stopped when Oil pump STOP button X2 is activated, and the main
motor will be stopped when Main motor STOP button X3 is activated.

1-12

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.12 First-in Priority Circuit

X0

Y0

X1

Pupil Group
小学生组

X3

X2 Y1
中学生组
High
School
Student Group

Y2

X4

教 授 组 Group
Professor

X5

主持
人
Host

Control Purpose:
z

There are 3 groups participating in the quiz game: pupils, high school students and
professors. If they want to get the chance of answering the question from the host, they
must press the answer button on their table first. Other groups’ pressing will be invalid if any
group gets the chance successfully

z

There are 2 answer buttons for the pupil group and professor group and 1 answer button for
the high school student group. In order to give preferential treatment to the pupil group, Y0
will be ON if any one of X0 or X1 is pressed. However, in order to limit the professor group,
Y2 will be ON when X3 and X4 are pressed at the same time. For the high school student
group, Y1 will be ON when X2 is pressed.

z

If the host presses X5 (Reset button), Y0, Y1 and Y2 will be OFF.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Answer button for pupil group

X1

Answer button for pupil group

X2

Answer button for high school student group

X3

Answer button for professor group

X4

Answer button for professor group

X5

Reset button for host

Y0

Indicator for pupil group

Y1

Indicator for high school student group

Y2

Indicator for professor group

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1-13

1. Basic Program Design Examples
Control Program:
X5
MC

N0

Reset button for the host
X0

Y1

Y2

Start of main control circuit

Y0

Control of the pupil group

Y1

Control of the high school student group

Y2

Control of the professor group

X1
Y0
X2

Y0

Y2

Y1
X3

X4

Y0

Y1

Y2

MCR

N0

End of main control circuit

Program Description:
z

If the host didn’t press the reset button X5, [MC N0] instruction will be executed and the
program between MC and MCR will also be executed normally.

z

The answer buttons are connected in parallel connection for the pupil group, and in series
connection for the professor group. For the high school student group, there is only one
answer button. If one group presses the answer button successfully, its indicator will form a
latching circuit, that is, the indicator will be ON even the button is released.

z

Through the interlock circuit, any other button pressings will be invalid as long as one
indicator is ON

z

When the host presses the reset button, X5 = ON. [MC N0] instruction and the program
between MC and MCR will not be executed. Y0, Y1 and Y2 will be out of power, and all the
indicators for the 3 groups will be OFF. When the host releases the button, X5 = OFF. The
program between MC and MCR will be executed normally again, and the new round will
begin as well.

1-14

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.13 Last-in Priority Circuit
Control Purpose:
z

There are 4 buttons corresponding to 4 indicators. The program is to turn on the indicators
corresponding to pressed buttons and to turn off the previous ON indicators.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Button 1. X0 will go from OFF to ON when pressed

X1

Button 2. X1 will go from OFF to ON when pressed

X2

Button 3. X2 will go from OFF to ON when pressed

X3

Button 4. X3 will go from OFF to ON when pressed

Y0

Indicator 1

Y1

Indicator 2

Y2

Indicator 3

Y3

Indicator 4

Control Program:
X0
PLS

M0

PLS

M1

PLS

M2

PLS

M3

CMP

K1M0

K0

MOV

K1M0

K1Y0

X1
X2
X3
M1000
M10

M11

Program Description:
z

When a button is pressed, the corresponding device X will go from OFF to ON. In this scan
cycle, PLS instruction is executed, and the corresponding internal relay M is enabled as well.
CMP instruction will be executed and the compared result is K1M0>0 which makes M10 ON
but M11 OFF. [MOV K1M0 K1Y0] instruction will then be executed and sent out the state of
M to its corresponding output Y.

At the same time, the previous ON indicator(Y) will be

turned off.
z

When it comes to the 2nd scan cycle, PLS instructions will not be executed and the value of
M0~M3 will be 0. Therefore, the CMP instruction will be executed and set M11 to be ON
(K1M0 = 0). [MOV K1M0 K1Y0] instruction will not be executed, and the 0 state of device M
will not be sent out, either. In this case, Output Y will remain its original state until any other
button is pressed next time.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1-15

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.14 Entry/Exit Control of the Underground Car Park
Red Light Green Light

Y1

Y2

X1

Entry/Exit of the Ground Floor

Red Light Green Light

Si n g

al L a

Y1
Y2
X2
ne P

a ssa

ge

Entry/Exit of the Basement

Control Purpose:
z

The entry/exit of the underground car park is a single lane passage which needs the traffic
lights to control the cars. Red lights prohibit cars entering or leaving while green lights allow
cars to enter or leave.

z

When a car enters the passage from the entry of the ground floor, the red lights both on the
ground floor and the basement will be ON, and the green lights will be OFF. Any car entering
or leaving is prohibited during the process till the car passes through the passage completely.
When the passage is clear, the green lights will be ON again and allow other cars entering
from the ground floor or the basement.

z

Similarly, when a car leaves the basement and enters the passage, any other car entering or
leaving is prohibited till the car passes from the passage to the ground completely.

z

When PLC runs, the initial setting of traffic lights will be green lights ON and red lights OFF.

Devices:
Device

1-16

Function

X1

Photoelectric switch at the ground floor entry/exit. X1 will be ON when a car passes.

X2

Photoelectric switch at the basement entry/exit. X2 will be ON when a car passes.

M1

M1 will be ON for one scan cycle when a car from the ground floor passes X1.

M2

M2 will be ON for one scan cycle when a car from the basement passes X1.

M3

M3 will be ON for one scan cycle when a car from the basement passes X2.

M4

M4 will be ON for one scan cycle when a car from the ground floor passes X2

M20

M20 = ON during the process of a car entering the passage from the ground floor.

M30

M30 = ON during the process of a car entering the passage from the basement.

Y1

Red lights at the entry/exit of the ground floor and the basement

Y2

Green lights at the entry/exit of the ground floor and the basement

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1. Basic Program Design Examples

Control Program:
M1002
RST

Y1

SET

Y2

X1

M1 will be ON for one scan cycle
when a car from the ground floor passes X1.

PLS

M3
M4
M2

M4
M2

M2 will be ON for one scan cycle
when a car from the basement passes X1.

PLF

M2

SET

M20

PLS

M3

M3 will be ON for one scan cycle
when a car from the basement passes X2.

PLF

M4

M4 will be ON for one scan cycle
when a car from the ground floor passes X2.

SET

M30

SET

Y1

X2

M1

The green lights will be ON and
the red lights will be OFF when
the program is started

M30

M20=ON during the process of a car
entering the passage from the ground floor.

M3 0=ON during the process of a car
entering the passage from the basement.

M20
RST

Y2

RST

Y1

SET

Y2

RST

M20

When a car runs in the passage,
the red lights will be ON and green lights will be OFF.

M20
M30

When a car leaves the passage,
the red lights will be OFF and green lights will be ON.

M20
M30
RST

M30

When a car leaves the passage,
M20 and M30 will be reseted.

Program Description:
z

The ground floor and the basement share the same red light signal Y1 and green light signal
Y2.

z

The key of the program is to identify that the car is entering or leaving the passage at the
ground floor entry/exit when M1 is ON to activate Y1 because [PLS M1] will be executed in
both entering and leaving conditions. Therefore, the confirming signal M20 is required for
confirming that the car is entering the passage from the ground floor.

z

Also, it needs to identify that the car is entering or leaving the passage at the basement
entry/exit when M3 is ON because [PLS M3] will be executed in both entering and leaving
conditions. Therefore, the confirming signal M30 is required for confirming that the car is
entering the passage from the basement.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1-17

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.15 Forward/Reverse Control for the Three-Phase Asynchronous Motor
Forward

Forward

Reverse
Stop

Reverse

Control Purpose:
z

Controlling the motor to run forward when Forward is pressed, run reverse when Reverse is
pressed and stop when Stop is pressed.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Forward button of the motor. X0 will be ON when pressed

X1

Reverse button of the motor. X1 will be ON when pressed

X2

Stop button. X2 will be ON when pressed.

T1

1 sec timer

T2

1 sec timer

Y0

Forward contactor

Y1

Reverse contactor

Control Program:
X0
TMR
T0

X1

X2

T0

K10

T1

K10

Y1
Y0

Y0
X1
TMR
T1

X0

X2

Y0
Y1

Y1

Program Description:
z

X0 = ON when Forward is pressed. After 1 second, contactor Y0 will be enabled, and the
motor begins to run forward. On the other hand, X1 = ON when Reverse is pressed. After 1
second, contactor Y1 will be enabled, and the motor begins to run reverse. Besides, Y0 and
Y1 will be disabled and the motor will stop running when X2 is pressed.

z

The two timers in the program are used to avoid the interphase short-circuit when the motor
changes its running mode. The short circuit may occur if another contactor is enabled
instantly while the electric arc in the disabled contactor still exists.

1-18

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.16 Selective Execution of Programs
Green
X3

Yellow

Blue

Y0

Y1

X2 Blue

Yellow X1

Color Selection

X0

Control Purpose:
z

There are pigments of 3 colors. By controlling different switches, operators can fill the cans
with corresponding pigments.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Filling Start switch. X0 will be ON when turned on.

X1

Yellow control switch. X1 will be ON when turned on.

X2

Blue control switch. Turn it on, X2 will be On

X3

Green (mixing of yellow and blue) control switch. X3 will be ON when turned on

Y0

Yellow control valve

Y1

Blue control valve

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1-19

1. Basic Program Design Examples

Control Program
X1
MC

N0

X3
Filling yellow pigment

X0
Y0
MCR

Yellow control valve

N0
Filling green pigment

X2
MC

N0

X3
X0
Y1
MCR

Filling blue pigment
Blue control valve
N0

Program Description:
z

The master switch of filling control needs to be turned on (X0 = ON) before filling started.
When both yellow and blue are filled at the same time, it will become green.

z

When the switch of filling yellow pigment is turned on, X1 = ON. The first MC ~ MCR
instruction will be executed. Y0 = ON, and the system begins to fill the yellow color.

z

When the switch of filling blue pigment is turned on, X2 = ON. The second MC ~ MCR
instruction will be executed. Y1 = ON, and the system begins to fill the blue color.

z

When the switch of filling green pigment is turned on, X3 = ON, both of the two MC ~ MCR
instructions will be executed, and the system begins to fill the green color.

1-20

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.17 MC/MCR - Manual/Auto Control

Auto
Manual

X0
X1

Clip
Transfer
Release

Conveyor A

Conveyor B

Control Purpose:
z

When the button Manual is pressed, the robotic arm will begin to execute the manual control
process: pressing Clip to clip the product from conveyor A, pressing Transfer to move the
product to the conveyor B, and pressing Release to release the product and send it away by
conveyor B.

z

When the button Auto is pressed, the robotic arm will begin to execute the auto control
process once: clip product (keep holding this product before releasing) → transfer product
(the action takes 2 sec) → release the product. Auto control process can be performed one
more time if the button Auto is pressed again.

z

Manual control process and auto control process are interlocked.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Auto button. X0 goes from OFF to ON when pressed.

X1

Manual button. X1 goes from OFF to ON when pressed

X2

Clip button. X2 will be ON when pressed.

X3

Transfer button. X3 will be ON when pressed.

X4

Release button. X4 will be ON when pressed.

M0~M2

Auto control process

M3~M5

Manual control process

M10

Auto control selection

M11

Manual control selection

T0

2 sec timer

Y0

Product clipping/releasing. Y0 is ON/OFF when clipping/releasing the product.

Y1

Product transferring

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1-21

1. Basic Program Design Examples

Control Program:
X0
SET

M10
Set auto control

RST

M11

SET

M11

RST

M10

MC

N0

X1
Set manual control
M10

M11

M1000
M0
M1000
TMR

T0

K20

T0

Auto control process

M1
T0
M2
M2
RST

M11

M10

MCR

N0

MC

N0

M10

X2
M3
X3

Manual control process

M4
X4
M5
MCR

N0

SET

Y0

M0
Product clipping

M3
M1
Y1

Product Transferring

M4
M2
RST

Y0

Product releasing

M5

1-22

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1. Basic Program Design Examples

Program Description:
z

When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the auto control process will be executed once, whereas
when X1 goes from OFF to ON, the manual control process will be executed. In the manual
control, the clipping and releasing actions require pressing the corresponding button for one
time. However, the button Transfer should be pressed for 2 sec during the moving process
till the product is moved to Conveyor B.

z

X0 and X1 are interlocked. When the auto control process is executed, the robotic arm will
perform the following actions: first “clipping”, then “transferring” (for 2 sec.), and “releasing.”
When the manual control process is executed, the controlling actions will be performed by 3
corresponding buttons: clipping product by turning on Y0, transferring product by pressing
Y1 and releasing product by turning off Y0.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1-23

1. Basic Program Design Examples
1.18 STL Manual/Auto Control

Auto
Manual

Clip

X0

Transfer

X1

Release

Conveyor A

Conveyor B

Control Purpose:
z

When the button Manual is pressed, the robotic arm will begin to execute the manual control
process: pressing Clip to clip the product from conveyor A, pressing Transfer to move the
product to the conveyor B, and pressing Release to release the product and send it away by
conveyor B.

z

When the button Auto is pressed, the robotic arm will begin to execute the auto control
process once: clip product (keep holding this product before releasing) → transfer product
(the action takes 2 sec) → release the product. Auto control process can be performed one
more time if the button Auto is pressed again.

z

Manual control process and auto control process are interlocked.

Devices:
Device

1-24

Function

X0

Auto button. X0 goes from OFF to ON when pressed.

X1

Manual button. X1 goes from OFF to ON when pressed

X2

Clip button. X2 will be ON when pressed.

X3

Transfer button. X3 will be ON when pressed.

X4

Release button. X4 will be ON when pressed.

S0

Initial step

S20

Auto control step

S21

Manual control step

T0

2 sec timer

Y0

Product clipping/releasing. Y0 is ON/OFF when clipping/releasing the product

Y1

Product transferring

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1. Basic Program Design Examples

Control Program:
M1002
S0
S

X0
X1

S20
S

SET

S0

SET

S20

Auto Control Button

SET

S21

Manual Control Button

SET

Y0

Clipping Product

TMR

T0

K20

T0
Y1
T0

RST

Transferring Product
Y0

Releasing Product

Y0

Clipping Product

S0
S21
S

X2
SET
X3
Y1
X4
Y0

RST

Transferring Product
Y0

Releasing Product

S0
RET

Program Description:
z

When X0 goes from OFF to ON, the step S20 will be set to execute auto control process one
time, and the manual control process will be prohibited at the same time. Auto control
process can be performed one more time if the button Auto is pressed again.

z

The auto control process performed by the robotic arm: clipping product when X0 = ON
(keep holding this product before releasing) → transferring product when Y1 = ON (the
action takes 2 sec) → releasing the product when Y0 = OFF.

z

When X1 goes from OFF to ON, the step S21 will be set to execute manual control process
one time, and the auto control process will be prohibited at the same time.

z

The manual control process performed by the robotic arm: pressing Clip(X2) to clip the
product from conveyor A, pressing Transfer(X3) to move the product to the conveyor B, and
pressing Release(X4) to release the product and send it away by conveyor B.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

1-25

1. Basic Program Design Examples

MEMO

1-26

DVP-PLC Application Examples

2. Counter Design Examples
2.1

Product Mass Packaging
X0

Y0
X1

Control Purpose:
z

Once the photoelectric sensor detects 10 products, the robotic arm will begin to pack up.
When the action is completed, the robotic arm and the counter will be reset.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Photoelectric sensor for counting products. X0 = ON when products are detected.

X1

Robotic arm action completed sensor. X1 = ON when packing is completed.

C0

Counter: 16-bit counting up (general purpose)

Y0

Robotic arm for packing

Control Program:
X0
CNT

C0

K10

C0
Y0
X1
RST

Y0

RST

C0

Program Description:
z

Once the photoelectric sensor detects a product, X0 will go from OFF to ON once, and C0
will count for one time.

z

When the present value in C0 reaches 10, the Normally Open contact C0 will be closed. Y0
= ON, and the robotic arm will begin to pack.

z

When the packing is completed, the robotic arm action completed sensor will be enabled. X1
will go from OFF to ON and RST instruction will be executed. Y0 and C0 will be reset for the
next packing task.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

2-1

2. Counter Design Examples
2.2

Daily Production Record (16-bit Counting Up Latched Counter)
X1
Daily Quantity
今日完成
Completion

Clear

X0

456

Control Purpose:
z

The production line may be powered off accidentally or turned off for noon break. The
program is to control the counter to retain the counted number and resume counting after
the power is ON again.

z

When the daily production reaches 500, the target completed indicator will be ON to remind
the operator for keeping a record.

z

Press the Clear button to clear the history records. The counter will start counting from 0
again.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Photoelectric sensor. Once detecting the products, X0 will be ON.

X1

Clear button

C120
Y0

Counter: 16-bit counting up (latched)
Target completed indicator

Control Program:
X0
CNT

C120

K500

C120
Y0
X1
RST

C120

Program Description:

2-2

z

The latching counter is demanded for the situation of retaining data when power-off.

z

When a product is completed, C120 will count for one time. When the number reaches 500,
DVP-PLC Application Examples

2. Counter Design Examples
target completed indicator Y0 will be ON.
z

For different series of DVP-PLC, the setup range of 16-bit latching counter is different. C112
~ C127 for ES/EX/SS series, C96 ~ C199 for SA/SX/SC series and C100 ~ C199 for EH
series.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

2-3

2. Counter Design Examples
2.3

Products Amount Calculation (32-bit Counting Up/Down Counter)

Exit

Entry

Control Purpose:
z

This program is used for monitoring the product amount in the warehouse by photoelectric
sensors at both entry and exit. When the amount reaches 40,000, the alarm will be enabled.

Devices:
Device
X0
X1
M1216
C216
Y0

Function
Photoelectric sensors for monitoring incoming goods. X0 = ON when incoming
detected.
Photoelectric sensors for monitoring outgoing goods. X1 = ON when outgoing
detected.
Counting mode of C216(ON: counting down)
32-bit counting up/down counter
Alarm

Control Program:
X0
RST

M1216

SET

M1216

X1
X0
DCNT

C 216

K40000

X1
C216
Y0

Program Description:
z

The key of this example is using the 32-bit addition/subtraction flag M1216 to control the
counting up/ down of C216. When X0 goes from OFF to ON, M1216 = OFF, and C216 will
count up; when X1 goes from OFF to ON, M1216 = ON, C216 will count down.

z

When the present value of C216 reaches 40,000, C216 = ON, and the alarm Y0 will be
enabled.

2-4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

2. Counter Design Examples
2.4

24-hour Clock Operated by 3 Counters

Hour

Minute

Second

Control Purpose:
z

Using 3 counters together with the flag of M1013 (1s clock pulse) to operate a 24-hour clock.

Devices:
Device

Function

C0

count per second

C1

count per minute

C2

count per hour

M1013

1s clock pulse

Control Program:
M1013
CNT

C0

K60

CNT

C1

K60

RST

C0

CNT

C2

RST

C1

RST

C2

C0

C1
K24

C2

Program Description:
z

The key of operating a 24-hour clock is to use M1013 (1s clock pulse). When the program is
executed, C0 will count once per second. When the counted number reaches 60(1 minute),
C0 = ON. C1 will count once, and C0 will be reset at the same time; similarly, when the
counted number in C1 reaches 60(1 hour), C1 = ON. C2 will count once, and C1 will be
reset at the same time. Furthermore, when the present value in C2 reaches 24, C2 will be
reset, and the 24-hour counting process will start again.

z

The 24-hour clock operates by using C0 to count “second”, C1 to count “minute” and C2 to
count “hour.” In this clock, the value of “second”, “minute” and “hour” can be read by C0, C1
and C2 correspondingly. When the set value of C2 is 12, the clock will be a 12-hour clock.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

2-5

2. Counter Design Examples

2.5

A B-phase Pulse High-speed Counter
z

Wiring for Differential Input(high-speed, high-noise condition)
DVP32EH00M High-speed Input
X0+

A+

X0-

A-

A
Differntial Output

T wisted P air C able

z

X1+

B+

X1-

B-

B

Wiring for Differential Output
PLC

Y0

Servo Driver
Y0+

A+

Y0-

A-

SG0
Y1

Photocouple
Input Wiring

Twisted Pair Cable

Y1+

B+

Line Receiver

Y1-

B-

Input Wiring

Control Purpose:
z

DVP32EH00M sends AB-phase pulse to control the servo at a speed of 10,000 pulses per
second. The motor rotation will be encoded by the encoder and the result will be transferred to
the input points (differential input) of PLC high-speed counter. If the counted value in PLC
high-speed counter is different from the number of pulse sent by the MPU, the alarm will be
enabled.

Devices:
Device

2-6

Function

Y0

100KHz pulse output

Y5

Alarm indicator

M1013

1s clock pulse

M1029

Pulse output completed flag

D1220

Setting the first group output phase, CH0(Y0, Y1)

C251

High-speed counter

DVP-PLC Application Examples

2. Counter Designing Example
Control Program:
The output speed of Y0 is 10000 pulses per
second with a frequency of 100K

M1013

DPLSY K100000 K10000

MOV

K0

D1220

DCNT

C251

K20000

Y0

M1000

M1029
DLD<=

C251

K9990

Y5

RST

C251

Program Description:
z

In this example, M1013 is used to control PLC for sending pulses. D1220 = K0 activates Y0 to
output pulses and transfer the encoded feedback signal of servo motor from the encoder to the
high-speed inputs (X0, X1). X0 and X1 are corresponded to high-speed counter C251, whose
max counting frequency is 200 kHz.

z

When pulse sending is completed, M1029 = ON. The Load Compare instruction DLD<= will be
executed. If the difference between the value of C251 and the number of pulses is above
10(C251 value≦K9990), the alarm Y5 will be enabled.

z

When M1029 = ON, [RST C251] will be executed. The value of C251 will be cleared to ensure
that C251 will start counting from 0 next time.

z

Since the output signal of servo encoder is differential signal, the example requires
DVP32EH00M model which supports differential signal input with its input terminal X0, X1, X4,
and X5.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

2-7

2. Counter Design Examples
MEMO

2-8

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples

3.1

Delay OFF Program

Control Purpose:
z

Enabling the indicator to be ON immediately and OFF after a 5 sec delay by the switch
5s
X1
T0
Y1

Devices:
Device

Function

X1

X1 = OFF when the switch is turned off

T1

5 sec timer. Time base = 100ms

Y1

Output indicator

Control Program:
X1

T1
Y1

Y1
X1
TMR

T1

K50

Delay OFF for 5 sec

Program Description:
z

X1 = ON when the switch is turned on. The NC (Normally Closed) contact X1 will be
activated, and TMR instruction will not be executed. Coil T1 will be OFF and so will the NC
contact T1. Because X1 = ON, the indicator Y1 will be ON and latched.

z

X1 = OFF when the switch is turned off. The NC contact X1 will not be activated, which
makes TMR instruction executed. Indicator Y1 will remain ON by the latched circuit until T1
reaches its set value.

z

When timer T1 reaches its set value of 5 seconds, coil T1 will be ON. The NC contact T1 will
be activated, which makes the indicator Y1 OFF.

z

Delay OFF function can also be performed by using API 65 STMR instruction.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3-1

3. Timer Design Examples
3.2

Delay ON Program

Control Purpose:
z

Enabling the indicator to be ON after a 3 sec delay and OFF immediately by the switch
X1
3s
T0
Y1

Devices:
Device

Function

X1

X1 = ON when the switch is turned on

T1

3 sec timer, time base = 100ms

Y1

Output indicator

Control Program:
X1
TMR

T1

K30

Delay ON for 3 sec

T1
Y1

Program Description:
z

When X1 = ON, TMR instruction will be executed. Timer T1 will be ON and start counting for
3 sec. When T1 reaches its set value, the NO (Normally Open) contact T1 will be activated
and indicator YI will be ON.

z

When X1 = OFF, TMR instruction will not be executed. Timer T1 will be OFF and so will NO
contact T1. Therefore, the indicator Y1 will be OFF.

3-2

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples

3.3

Delay ON/OFF Program

Control Purpose:
z

Enabling the indicator to be ON after a 5 sec delay and OFF after a 3 sec delay by the
switch
3s
X1
Y1
5s

Devices:
Device

Function

X1

X1 = ON when the switch is turned on.

T0

5 sec timer, time base = 100ms

T1

3 sec timer, time base = 100ms

Y1

Output indicator

Control Program:
X1
X1
T0

TMR

T0

K50

Delay ON for 5 sec

TMR

T1

K30

Delay OFF for 3 sec

T1
Y1

Y1

Program Description:
z

When X1 = ON, T0 will start counting for 5 sec. When T0 reaches its set value, the NO
contact T0 will be ON while NC contact T1 will remain OFF, which makes the indicator Y1 to
be ON and latched.

z

When X1 = OFF, T1 will start counting for 3 sec. When T1 reaches its set value, the NC
contact T1 will be activated while the NO contact T0 will remain OFF, which makes the
indicator Y1 to be OFF.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3-3

3. Timer Design Examples
3.4

Sequential Delay Output (Starting 3 Motors Sequentially)
Y0

Oil Pump Motor

START X0

Main motor

Y1

Auxiliary Motor

Y2

STOP X1

Control Purpose:
z

Starting the oil pump motor immediately when START is pressed. The main motor will be
started after a 10 sec delay and then the auxiliary motor after a 5 sec delay. In addition,
stopping all motors immediately when STOP is pressed.
X0
X1

Y0

10s

Y1

5s

Y2

Devices:
Device

3-4

Function

X0

X0 = ON when START is pressed.

X1

X1 = ON when STOP is pressed.

T0

10 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T1

5 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

Y0

Starting the oil pump motor

Y1

Starting the main motor

Y2

Starting the auxiliary motor

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples
Control Program:
X0

X1

Y1

TMR

T0

K100

Y0
Y0
T0

X1

Y2

TMR

Starting the oil pump motor
T1

K50

Y1
T1

Y1

Starting the main motor

Y2

Starting the auxiliary motor

X1

Y2

Program Description:
z

When START is pressed, the NO contact X0 will be activated, which makes Y0 to be ON and
latched. The oil pump motor will start the lube system. At the same time, [TMR T0 K100]
instruction will be executed. When T0 reaches its set value of 10 sec, the NO contact T0 will
be ON.

z

When the NO contact T0 is ON, Y1 will be ON and latched, which starts the main motor and
stops timer T0. At the same time, [TMR T1 K50] is executed, and the NO contact T1 will be
ON when timer T1 reaches its set value.

z

When the NO contact T1 is ON, Y2 will be ON and latched, which starts the auxiliary motor
and stops T1.

z

When STOP is pressed, the NC contact X1 will be activated, which makes Y0, Y1 and Y2
OFF. The oil pump motor, main motor and auxiliary motor will stop working.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3-5

3. Timer Design Examples
3.5

Pulse-Width Modulation

Control Purpose:
z

Performing Pulse Width Modulation function by changing the set value of the timer in the
program. The oscillating pulse is as below: (Y0 = ON for 1 sec. The cycle = 2 sec)
X0
1000ms

Y0

2000ms

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 = ON when the switch is turned on

T0

1 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T1

2 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

Y0

Oscillating pulse output

Control Program:
X0
TMR

T0

K10

TMR

T1

K20

T0

T1

T0
Y0
T1
ZRST

Program Description:
z

When X0 = ON, timer T0/T1 will be activated. Y0 will be ON until timer T0 reaches its set
value. When timer T1 reaches its set value, T0/T1 will be reset. Therefore, Y0 will output the
above oscillating pulse continuously. When X0 = OFF, the output Y0 will be OFF as well.

z

Pulse Width Modulation function can be modified by changing the set value of the timer in
the program.

z

Pulse Width Modulation function can also be performed by using API 144 GPWM
instruction.
X0
GPWM

3-6

K1000

K2000

Y0

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples
3.6

Artificial Fishpond Water Level Monitoring System (Flashing Circuit)
X3

Y0

Y3

Y4

X2
X1

Y1

X0

X4
RESET

Y2

Control Purpose:
z

Feeding or draining water automatically when the water level of artificial fishpond is not at
the normal level. In addition to feeding / draining water, enabling the alarm and alarm lamp
when the water is above or below the alarm level.

z

Stopping the alarm when RESET is pressed.
X0
500ms
Alarm
Alarm Lamp

Y3/Y4
500ms

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 = ON when the water is above the lowest level of alarm level.

X1

X1 = ON when the water is above the lowest level of normal level.

X2

X2 = ON when the water is above the highest level of normal level.

X3

X3 = ON when the water is above the highest level of alarm level.

X4

X4 = ON when RESET is pressed.

T1

500ms timer. Time base: 100ms.

T2

500ms timer. Time base: 100ms.

Y0

1# drainage pump

Y1

Feeding pump

Y2

2# drainage pump

Y3

Alarm lamp

Y4

Alarm

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3-7

3. Timer Design Examples
Control Program:
X3
Y0
X1
Y1
X2
X0

Y2
T2
TMR

T1

K5

TMR

T2

K5

X3
T1
X0

T1

X3

Flashing Circuit

X4
RESET

Y3

Alarm Lamp

Y4

Alarm

Program Description:
z

When the water is at normal level: X0 = ON, X1 = ON, X2 = OFF and X3 = OFF. Therefore,
Y0 and Y2 will be OFF. Both the drainage pump and the feeding pump will not work.

z

When the water is lower than the normal level, X0 = ON, X1 = OFF, X2 = OFF and X3 = OFF.
Because X1 = OFF, Y1 will be ON. The feeding pump will start working.

z

When the water is below the lowest of alarm level, X0 = OFF, X1= OFF, X2 = OFF and X3 =
OFF. Because X1 = OFF, Y1 will be ON. The feeding pump will start working. In addition,
because X0 = OFF, the flashing circuit will be activated, which makes Y3 = ON and Y4 = ON,
The alarm lamp will flash and the alarm will ring.

z

When the water is above the normal level, X0 = ON, X1 = ON, X2 = ON, X3 = OFF. Because
X2 = ON, Y2 will be ON. 2# drainage pump will drain water from the fishpond.

z

When the water is above the highest of alarm level, X0 = ON, X1 = ON, X2 = ON, X3 = ON.
Because X2 = ON, Y2 will be ON. 2# drainage pump will work. In addition, because X3 = ON,
Y0 will be ON. 2# drainage pump will work. Besides, the alarm circuit will be executed,
which makes Y3 = ON and Y4 = ON. The alarm lamp will flash and the alarm will ring.

z

When Reset is pressed, the NC contact X4 will be activated. Y3 = OFF and Y4 = OFF. Both
the alarm and the alarm lamp will stop working.

3-8

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples

3.7

Burn-in Test System (Timing Extension)
X0
Y0

Control Purpose:
z

Warning the operator to take out PLC from the burn-in room by the test completed indicator
after 2.5 hours burn-in process.
X0
3000 s

T0
3000 s

T1
3000 s

T2

Y0
(3000+3000+3000)s

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

When X0 = ON, the burn-in test starts

T0

3,000 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T1

3,000 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T2

3,000 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

Y0

Burn-in test completed indicator

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3-9

3. Timer Design Examples
Control Program:
X0
TMR

T0

K30000

TMR

T1

K30000

TMR

T
T2

K30000

T0

T1
T2
Y0

Program Description:
z

The upper bound value for a 16-bit timer is 100ms × 32767 = 3276.7s, so it needs several
timers to work together for a timing extension application which is more than 1 hour (3600
sec.) The total time is the sum of each timer’s set value.

z

When the burn in test is started, X0 = ON. The timer T0 will start to count for 100ms × 30000
= 3000sec. When T0 reaches its set value, the NO contact T0 will be ON and T1 will start to
count for another 100ms × 30000 = 3000sec. When T1 reaches its set value, T2 will count
one more 3000 sec and turn on the NO contact T2. Finally, the burn-in test completed
indicator Y0 will be ON. The total time of the test is 3000s + 3000s + 3000s = 9000s =
150min = 2.5h.

z

3-10

The timing extension function can also be performed by using API 169 HOUR instruction.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples

3.8

Star-Delta Reduced Voltage Starter Control
KM1

KM0

KM2
M

Reduced Voltage Starting Main Circuit

24V

KM0

Y0
24G
SS
X0
X1

Y1
KM2

Y2
COM

PLC External Wiring

Control Purpose:
z

Usually the starting current of the three-phase AC asynchronous motor is 5 ~7 times larger
than the rated current. To reduce the effect of the starting current on the electrified wire
fence, a star-delta reduced voltage starter should be applied.

z

Starting process of a star-delta reduced voltage starter:
When the switch is turned on, the contactors of both motor starter and “Star Reduced
Voltage Starter” will be enabled first. After a 10 sec delay, the contactor of “Star Reduced
Voltage Starter” will be disabled. Finally, the contactor of “Delta Reduced Voltage Starter”
will be enabled after 1 sec, which operates the main motor circuit normally. The control
purpose in this process is to assure the contactor of “Star Reduced Voltage Starter” is
disabled completely before the contactor of “Delta Reduced Voltage Starter” is enabled.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 = ON when START is pressed.

X1

X1 = ON when STOP is pressed.

T1

10 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T2

1 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

Y0

Motor starting contactor KM0

Y1

“Star Reduced Voltage Starter” contactor KM1

Y2

“Delta Reduced Voltage Starter” conntactor KM2

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3-11

3. Timer Design Examples
Control Program:
X0

X1
Y0

Y0
TMR
Y0

T0

T0

K100

T1

K10

Y2
Y1

Y1

T0
TMR

T1

Y1

X1
Y2

Y2

Program Description:
z

X0 = ON when START is pressed. Y0 will be ON and latched. The motor starting contactor
KM0 will be ON and the timer T0 will start to count for 10 sec. At the same time, because Y0
= ON, T0 = OFF and Y2 = OFF, Y1 will be ON. The “Star Reduced Voltage Starter” contactor
KM1 will be activated.

z

When timer T0 reaches its set value, T0 will be ON and Y1 will be OFF. Timer T1 will start to
count for 1 sec. After 1 sec, T1 = ON and Y2 = ON. “Delta Reduced Voltage Starter”
contactor KM2 will be activated.

z

X1 = ON when STOP is pressed. Y0, Y1 and Y2 will be OFF and the motor will stop running
no matter it is in starting mode or running mode.

3-12

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples

3.9

Automatic Door Control
X0(Infrared Sensor.)

X2(Opening Limit Switch)

X1(Closing Limit Switch)

Y0(Open the door)

X2(Opening Limit Switch)

Y1(Close the door)

Control Purpose:
z

When someone enters the infrared sensing field, opening motor starts working to open the
door automatically till the door touches the opening limit switch

z

If the door touches the opening limit switch for 7 sec and nobody enters the sensing field,
the closing motor starts working to close the door automatically till the closing limit switch
touched together.

z

Stop the closing action immediately if someone enters the sensing field during the door
closing process.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 = ON when someone enters the sensing field.

X1

Closing limit switch. X1 = ON when 2 switches touched together.

X2

Opening limit switch. X2 = ON when the door touched the switches.

T0

7 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

Y0

Opening motor

Y1

Closing motor

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3-13

3. Timer Design Examples
Control Program:
X0

X2

Y1
Y0

Y0
X2

X0
TMR

T0

X0

X1

T0

K70

Y0
Y1

Y1

Program Description:
z

X0 = ON if someone enters the sensing field of the infrared sensor. Y0 will be ON and
latched, and the door will be opened as long as the opening limit switches X2 = OFF.

z

When the door touches the opening limit switches, X2 = ON. The timer T0 will start to count
for 7 sec if no one enters the sensing field (X0 = OFF). After 7 sec., Y1 will be ON and
latched and the door will be closed.

z

During the closing process, X0 = ON if someone enters the sensing field. The NC contact
X0 will be activated to turn Y1 off. Because X0 = ON, X2 = OFF and Y1 = OFF, Y0 will be
ON and the door will be opened once again.

3-14

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples

3.10

Automatic Liquids Mixing Control System

Y0 ( Liquid A Inlet)
X2

X0
START
X1
STOP
X10
EMERGENCY STOP

Y1(Liquid B Inlet )
Y3

X1
Y2(Mixture Outlet)

Control Purpose:
z

Automatically infusing the container with liquids A and B in order when START is pressed.
When it reaches the set level, mix the two liquids evenly then open the valve to let out the
mixture.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 = ON when START is pressed.

X1

Low level float sensor. X1 = ON when the liquid level reaches X1.

X2

High level float sensor. X2 = ON when the liquid level reaches X2.

X10

EMERGENCY STOP button. X10 = ON when the button is pressed.

T0

60 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T1

120 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

Y0

Liquid A inlet

Y1

Liquid B inlet

Y2

Mixture outlet

Y3

Agitator

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3-15

3. Timer Design Examples
Control Program:
X0

X1

X10
Y0

Y0
X1

X2

X10
Y1

Y1
X2

T0

X10
Y3
TMR

T0

T1

T0

K600

T1

K1200

X10
Y2

Y2
Y2
TMR

Program Description:
z

X0 = ON when START is pressed. Y0 will be ON and latched, and the valve will be opened
for infusing liquid A until the level reaches the low-level float sensor.

z

X1 = ON when the level reaches the low-level float sensor. Y1 will be ON and latched, and
the valve will be opened for infusing liquid B until the level reaches the high-level float
sensor.

z

X2 = ON when the level reaches the high-level float sensor. Y3 will be ON and activates the
agitator. Also, timer T0 will start to count for 60 sec. After 60 sec, T0 will be ON, and the
agitator motor Y3 will stop working. Y2 will be ON and latched, and the mixture will drain out
of the container.

z

When Y2 = ON, timer T1 will start to count for 120 sec. After 120 sec, T1 will be ON and Y2
will be OFF. The draining process will be stopped.

z

When an error occurs, press EMERGENCY STOP button X10. The NC contact X10 will be
ON to disable all the outputs. The system will then stop running.

3-16

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples

3.11

Automatic Coffee Maker
Hot热水
Water

咖啡
Coffee
Y1

X0
Coin Detector
Y0
Paper Cup Outlet

Y2
Mixing Container
X1
X2
X1

Y3

Y4

Control Purpose:
z

Making the paper cup come out of the outlet when a coin is inserted. At the same time, the
coffee pours in the mixing container. After 2 sec, the hot water pours in. 60 sec later, the
ready-made coffee will be pouring out from the coffee outlet.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

T0

Coin detector. X0 = ON when a coin is inserted.
Pressure detector. X1 = ON when the liquid in the container reaches a certain
amount of pressure.
2 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T1

60 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

Y0

Paper cup outlet

Y1

Coffee outlet

Y2

Hot water outlet

Y3

Agitator

Y4

Ready-made coffee outlet

X1

Control Program:
X0

Y0

Y1

DVP-PLC Application Examples

SET

Y0

SET

Y1

TMR

T0

T0
K20

3-17

3. Timer Design Examples
T0
SET

Y2

RST

Y0

RST

Y1

RST

Y2

SET

Y3

TMR

T1

SET

Y4

RST

Y3

RST

Y4

X1

T1
K600

T1

X1

Program Description:
z

X1 = ON when a coin is inserted. Y0 and Y1 will be ON and latched. A paper cup will be sent
out, and a certain amount of coffee will be poured into the container at the same time.

z

Y0 and Y1 will be ON for 2 sec which is the set value of timer T0. When NO contact T0 is
ON, Y2 will be activated and the hot water will be poured in the container. At the same time,
the outlets of both paper cup and coffee will be closed.

z

When the liquid in the container reaches a certain amount of pressure, X1 = ON. Therefore,
the hot water outlet Y2 will be reset, and the agitator Y3 will be ON for 60 sec. After 60 sec,
NO contact T1 will be ON. Y4 will be ON and latched, and Y3 will be reset at the same time.
The agitator will stop working, and the ready-made coffee will be pouring out from the outlet.

z

When the coffee is poured into the paper cup completely, X1 will be OFF and Y4 will be
reset. The ready-made coffee outlet will be closed.

3-18

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples

3.12

Automatic Urinal Flushing Control Program

Control Purpose:
z

If a user stands in front of the urinal for more than 3 sec, the flushing control device will flush
the urinal for 3 sec (the first flushing). When the user leaves the urinal, flush for another 4
sec then stop automatically (the second flushing).
X0

Y0
3s
3s
Standing time
The first flushing

z

4s
The second flushing

Stopping the first flushing and starting the second flushing if the first user leaves the urinal
during the first flushing process.
The first user
X0
3s

Y0

The first flushing

3s
Standing time

4s
The second flushing

z

If the second user comes before the finishing of the 4 sec flushing, the flusher will finish the
4 sec flushing process and skip the first 3 sec flushing process. When the second user
leaves the urinal, the flusher will perform another 4 sec flushing.
The first user

The second user

X0

Y0
3s
Standing time

3s
The first flushing

4s

4s
The second flushing

The second flushing

Devices:
Device
X0
M0 ~ M2

Function
Infrared sensor. X0 = ON when a user is detected.
Internal auxiliary relay

T0

3 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T1

3 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T2

4 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

Y0

Flushing valve

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3-19

3. Timer Design Examples
Control Program:
X0
X0

TMR

T0

K30

SET

M2

SET

M0

TMR

T1

K30

TMR

T2

K40

ZRST

M0

M1

Y0

T0
M0
X0

M2
M0
M1

M1
T2
M0

T1

M2
Y0

X0

M0

T2

M1
X0
RST

M2

Program Description:
z

When a user is detected, infrared sensor X0 will be ON. In this case, T0 will be ON and start
to count for 3 sec. If the user leaves in 3 sec, X0 = OFF, and T0 will be OFF. No action will be
performed. If the user stands for more than 3 sec, the NO contact T0 will be activated, which
turns on M0. The first flushing will start (Y0 = ON).

z

M1 is latched in this program. If the user leaves after 3 sec, which means the NO contact M0
= ON and the NC contact X0 is OFF, M1 will be ON and latched. The second flushing will
then be started. After 4 sec, both the NO contact and the NC contact of T2 will be activated.
Therefore, Y0 will be OFF, and the flushing will be stopped. M0 and M1 will be reset.
Because M1 is latched, the second flushing process will certainly be executed whether X0
changes its state or not.

3-20

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples

3.13

Performing Accumulative Function with Normal Timer

X0
Y0

X1

Car Washer

GO

Control Purpose:
z

Ensuring that the customers wash their cars for entire 5 minutes no matter how many times
the sprayer valve stops. .

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Sprayer valve switch. X0 = ON when the sprayer handle is held on tightly.

X1

Coin detector. X1 = ON when an inserted coin is detected.

M1

Creating a trigger pulse for one program scan cycle

T1

Timer. Time base: 100ms

D10

Storing present value of T1

Y0

Sprayer valve

Control Program:
X0
PLS

M1

MOV

D10

T1

TMR

T1

K3000

MOV

T1

D10

K0

D10

M1

T1
Y0
X1
MOV

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3-21

3. Timer Design Examples
Program Description:
z

When customers insert coins in the slot, X1 = ON. The time value of D10 will be cleared.

z

When customers compress the sprayer handle, X0 = ON. PLS instruction will be executed.
M1 will be ON for one program scan cycle, which starts T1 to count from 0 to 5 min (T1 =
K3000). In this case, Y0 = ON, and the sprayer valve is open.

z

If the sprayer handle is released, the timer will stop counting. The present value in the timer
will be saved and the water spraying will be interrupted.

z

When customers compress the sprayer handle again, the timer will start to count from the
value saved in D10. Because the present value of T1 is sent to D10 and saved when T1 is
working, the saved value will be sent to T1 as its present value when T1 is activated again.
Therefore, even if there are some interruptions of the sprayer valve in the washing process,
the program assures customers of entire 5 minutes car washing service.

3-22

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples

3.14

Performing Teaching Function with Normal Timer
X2

X0

X3

Teach

X1
Start

Manual Auto

Control Purpose:
z

In Manual mode, the engineers should adjust stamping time according to their experience.
The stamping time depends on the time of pressing Teach.

z

In Auto mode, if Start is pressed, the machine will perform stamping process once according
to the time value saved by Teach process.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Teach Button. X0 = ON when the button Teach is pressed.

X1

Start button. X1 = ON when the button Start is pressed.

X2

Manual mode

X3

Auto mode

M1

Start trigger in auto mode

T0

Timer. Time base: 100ms

T1

Timer. Time base: 100ms

D0

Data register. Saving the time value of stamping

Y0

Starting the punch when Teach is pressed

Y1

Starting the punch when Start is pressed in Auto mode

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3-23

3. Timer Design Examples
Control Program:
X0

X2

X3
TMR

T0

K32767

TMR

T0

D0

Y0
X1
M1

X2

SET

M1

TMR

T1

X3
D0

T1
Y1
T1
RST

M1

Program Description:
z

X2 = ON when the switch is turned to Manual mode. X0 = ON when Teach is pressed. In this
case, coil Y0 will be ON and start the stamping process. At the same time, T0 will be
executed and its present value will be sent to D0. Release the button Teach when the
stamping process is completed. Y0 will be OFF, and the stamping process will be stopped.

z

X3 = ON when the switch is turned to Auto mode. Each time when X1 is pressed, Y1 will be
ON and the stamping process will be executed. At the same time, T1 will be activated to
count until it achieves the target value (the saved value in T0). When the stamping time is
achieved, the NC contact T1 and the rising edge trigger T1 will be activated and enable both
M1 and Y1 to be OFF. The stamping process will thus be stopped. When the button Start is
pressed again, M1 will be ON and repeats the same stamping process.

z

3-24

The timer teaching function can also be performed by using API 64 TTMR instruction.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples

3.15

Auto Interruption Timer

Production Line 1

Production Line 2

Y0

Y1

Control Purpose:
z

In PLC production lines, an operator should be in charge of packing products on two
conveyor belts into 2 boxes. For ensuring that operators have sufficient time for packing, the
program is designed to control two conveyor belts to be running alternatively: stops one
conveyor after 30 sec running and then starts another conveyor for 30 sec running.

Devices:
Device

Function

T0

30 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

M0

Controlling the trigger circuit

M1

Alternating the conveyor belt

Y0

Executing the production line 1

Y1

Executing the production line 2

Control Program:
T0
TMR

T0

K300

T0
M0
M0

Trigger Circuit

M1
M1

M0

M1

M1
Y0
M1
Y1

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3-25

3. Timer Design Examples
Program Description:
z

This program uses the NC contact T0 as the executing condition of the timer T0. When T0
reaches its set value, 30 sec, it will be activated. The trigger circuit will be executed to
change the state of M1. Production line 1 will then start working.

z

After 30 sec counting, T0 turns ON. The NC contact T0 will be activated. At the same time,
timer T0 will thus be OFF, which makes the NC contact T0 to be OFF again. In the next scan
period, because the NC contact T0 is OFF, timer T0 will start counting. After 30 sec counting,
T0 will be activated and so will the trigger circuit. In this case, M1 changes its state again.
Production line 1 will be stopped and production line 2 will start working.

z

By using the trigger circuit to activate Y0 and Y1 alternatively, the program makes the two
production lines to convey products alternatively.

3-26

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples

3.16

Interesting Fountain

Y0

X0

Control Purpose:
z

Keeping the Running indicator in ON state when the Start button is pressed.

z

Enabling the following devices to start in order after Running indicator is ON for 2 sec:
middle sprayer light > middle sprayer valve > surrounding lights > surrounding sprayer
valves. Each of them will be ON for 2 sec.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 = ON when the Start button of the fountain is pressed.

T0

2 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T1

2 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T2

2 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T3

2 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T4

2 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

Y0

Running indicator of the fountain

Y1

Middle sprayer light

Y2

Middle sprayer valve

Y3

Surrounding lights

Y4

Surrounding sprayer valves

Control Program:
X0

Y0

Running indicator of the fountain

X0
Y0

Y1

Y2

Y3

ZRST

Y1

Y4

TMR

T0

K20

SET

Y1

Y4

T0

The Running indicator works
for 2 sec.

T4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3-27

3. Timer Design Examples
Y1

Y2

Y3

Y4
TMR

T1

SET

Y2

RST

Y1

TMR

T2

SET

Y3

RST

Y4

TMR

T3

SET

Y4

RST

Y3

TMR

T4

RST

Y4

K20

T1

Y2

Y3

The middle sprayer light
works for 2 sec.

Y4
K20

T2

Y3

The middle sprayer valve
works for 2 sec.

Y4
K20

T3
The surrounding lights work for 2 sec.

Y4
T4

K20

The surrounding sprayer valves
work for 2 sec.

Program Description:
z

X0 = ON when the button Start is pressed. Coil Y0 will be ON to activate the Running
indicator. Y0 = ON is used as the executing condition for the timer T0. After 2 sec counting
down, T0 goes from OFF to ON and executes [SET Y1] instruction. The middle sprayer light
Y1 will be ON. The Running indicator Y0 will be kept in ON state through the whole working
process.

z

Likewise, Y1 = ON is used as the executing condition for the timer T1, and so does Y2 = ON
for the timer T2 as well as Y3 = ON for the timer T3. The executions will be assured in the
following order: Y1, Y2, Y3, and Y4.

z

The middle sprayer light, middle sprayer valve, surrounding lights, and surrounding sprayer
valves need to be started in order. Therefore, when T1, T2 and T3 go from OFF to ON and
set the next execution, they also reset the present execution. In addition, the NC contacts of
Y1, Y2, Y3 and Y4 are used for turning off timers T0, T1, T2 and T3.

z

After the completion of the last execution, the rising edge switch T4 will reset Y4 and set Y1.
The second round of fountain display will then be started again.

z

When X0 = OFF, coil Y0 will be OFF to turn off the Running indicator. In addition, ZRST
instruction will be executed at the same time. Y1, Y2, Y3 and Y4 will be reset and all the
valves and lights in the fountain will be stopped immediately.

3-28

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples

3.17

Traffic Lights Control

North-South Direction
East-West Direction

Control Purpose:
z

Enabling the traffic lights to work by Start button X0 and to stop by Stop button X1.

z

Setting the time of red light in East-West direction as 60 sec and North-South direction with
a heavier traffic as 30 sec.

z

The time of red light in East-West direction equals to the time of “green light + green light
flashing + yellow light” in North-south direction, and vice versa.

z

When yellow light is ON, cars and pedestrians should not cross the road, and yellow light
will last for 5 sec for the crossing cars and pedestrians to pass safely.

z

Timing diagram of traffic lights in East-West direction:
Red (Y0)

60 s

20 s

Green (Y1)

5s
5s

Yellow (Y2)

z

Timing diagram of traffic lights in North-South direction:

Red (Y10)

Green (Y11)

Yellow (Y12)

DVP-PLC Application Examples

30 s

60 s
5s
5s

3-29

3. Timer Design Examples
Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Start button

X1
T0

Stop button
60 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T1

20 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T2

5 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T10

50 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T11

5 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T12

5 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

T13

30 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

S0

Initial step

S10 ~ S13

Controlling the Traffic lights in East-West direction

S20 ~ S23

Controlling the Traffic lights in North-South direction

Y0

Red light in East-West direction

Y1

Green light in East-West direction

Y2

Yellow light in East-West direction

Y10

Red light in North-South direction

Y11

Green light in North-South direction

Y12

Yellow light in North-South direction

Control Program:
X0
PLS

M0

SET

S0

PLS

M1

ZRST

S0

SET

S10

SET

S20

X1

S0
S

S127

S10
S

Y0
TMR

T0

SET

S11

T0

3-30

K600

Red light in East-West direction
is ON for 60 sec.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3. Timer Design Examples

S11
S

Y1
TMR

T1

SET

S12

TMR

T2

K200

T1
S12
S

Green light in East-West direction
is ON for 20 sec.

K50

M1013

Y1
T2

SET

S13
S

Y2

S20
S

Y11

Green light in East-West direction
is flashing for 5 sec.

S13
Yellow light in East-West direction
is ON.

TMR

T10

SET

S21

TMR

T11

K500

T10

Green light in North-South direction
is ON for 50 sec.

S21
S

K50

M1013

Y11

Green light in North-South direction
is flashing for 5 sec.

T11

SET
S22
S

S22

Y12
TMR

T12

SET

S23

K50

T12
S23
S

Y10
TMR

S13
S

Yellow light in North-South direction
is ON for 5 sec.

S23
S

T13

K300

Red light in North-South direction
is ON for 30 sec.

T13

S0
RET

Program Description:
z

When Start is pressed, X0 = ON. PLS instruction will be executed, and M0 will create a
rising-edge pulse to set T0. The program will enter the step ladder process.

z

When Stop is pressed, X1 = ON. PLS instruction will be executed, and M1 will create a
rising-edge pulse to execute [ZRST S0 S127] instruction. All steps will be reset and all traffic

DVP-PLC Application Examples

3-31

3. Timer Design Examples
lights will be OFF.
z

This example is designed by the application of the simultaneous divergence sequence. The
two sequences running simultaneously are East-West direction and North-South direction.

z

When the red light of East-West direction is ON, the corresponding state of North-South
direction will be the sequence of “Green ON”, “Green Flashing” and “Yellow ON.”

z

When the East-West direction sequence is finished (the yellow light is OFF), the
North-South direction sequence will be finished as well (the red light is OFF). The program
will return to the initial step S0.

z

When a step is transferred from one sequence to another sequence, the former sequence
will be reset including the step and output point Y.

z

The time of yellow light in East-West direction (Y2) is not controlled by a timer because
when the red light in North-South direction is OFF, the yellow light in North-South direction
will be reset at the same time. In this case, T13 is ON to redirect the program to initial step
S0, and the outputs (Y2 and Y10) corresponding to S13 and S23 will thus be reset.

3-32

DVP-PLC Application Examples

4. Index Registers E, F Design Examples

4.1

Summation of Continuous D Registers

Control Purpose:
z

Summing up the values of D registers from D101 to DN (the number of N is determined by
users) and storing the operation result in D100. If the result < K-32768, the borrow flag = ON;
if the result > K32767, the carry flag = ON.

Devices:
Device

Function

Y0

Borrow flag indicator. When the value in D100 < K-32768, Y0 = ON

Y1

Carry flag indicator. When the value in D100 > K32767, Y1 = ON

E1

Index register

D100

Storing the sum of all D registers

D500

Storing the executing times of FOR-NEXT loop

Control Program:
M1000
MOV

K1

E1

MOV

K0

D100

FOR

D500

ADD

D100

INC

E1

M1000
D100E1

D100

NEXT
M1021
Y0
M1022
Y1

Program Description:
z

The key of the program is to use the index register E1 together with FOR ~ NEXT loop to
vary the addend D100E1. When E1 = K1, D100E1 represents D101; when E1 = K2, D100E1
represents D102. Also, when E1 = K10, D100E1 represents D110.

z

The number of continuous D registers is determined by the execution times of FOR ~NEXT
loop which is set by D500. If the value in D500 ≤ 1, the loop will execute 1 time. If the value
in D500 = K10, the loop will execute 10 times first and then execute the instructions behind

DVP-PLC Application Examples

4-1

4. Index Registers E, F Design Examples
the loop.
z

In the first FOR ~ NEXT loop, E1 = K1, so D100E1 represents D101. ADD instruction is
executed, and the operation result of D100 plus D101 is stored in D100. Since the
summand D100 = K0, the value stored in D100 equals to the value in D101. At the same
time, INC instruction is executed to set E1 = K2.

z

In the second FOR ~ NEXT loop, E1 = K2, so D100E1 represents D102. ADD instruction is
executed, and the operation result of the values of D100 plus D102 is stored in D100. Since
the summand D100 = D101, the value stored in D100 is the sum of the D101 and D102.

z

According to the same process, by the 10th FOR ~ NEXT loop the value in D100 will be the
sum of D101, D102, D103, D104, D105, D106, D107, D108, D109 and D110.

z

If the operation result < K-32768, M1021 will be ON to activate the output coil Y0. Borrow
flag indicator will be ON. On the contrary, if the operation result > K32767, M1022 will be ON
to activate output coil Y1. Carry flag indicator will be ON in this case.

4-2

DVP-PLC Application Examples

4. Index Registers E, F Design Examples

4.2

Parameter Setting for Product Recipe

Control Purpose:
z

For one product, there are 3 models which correspond to 3 sets of recipes. Each recipe
includes 10 parameters. The program executes the set parameters according to the
selected recipe switch.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Switch of the first recipe

X1

Switch of the second recipe

X2

Switch of the third recipe

D500 ~ D509

Parameters of the first group

D510 ~ D519

Parameters of the second group

D520 ~ D529

Parameters of the third group

D100 ~ D109

The present parameters

Control Program:
X0
MOV

K500

E1

MOV

K510

E1

MOV

K520

E1

RST

M0

RST

F1

FOR

K10

X1
X2
X0
X1
X2
M0

M0
MOV

D0E1

INC

E1

INC

F1

D100F1

NEXT
LD>=

DVP-PLC Application Examples

F1

K10

SET

M0

4-3

4. Index Registers E, F Design Examples
Program Description:
z

The key to this program is to use index register E1, F1 together with FOR ~ NEXT loop to
vary the numbers of D registers. In addition, the program transfers the parameters of the
selected recipe to the register of present parameters

z

When one recipe is selected, the corresponding switch X0, X1 or X2 will be ON. According
to the selected value of E1, the number of register D0E1 would be D500, D510 or D520.
[RST M0] will be executed to reset F1, and FOR ~ NEXT will be executed. Because F1 is
reset as K0, D100F1 represents D100 in this case.

z

The FOR ~ NEXT loop is executed for 10 times in this program. If the first recipe is selected,
D0E1 will vary from D500 to D509 and D100F1 will vary from D100 to D109.

z

In addition, the value of D500 will be sent to D100 in the first FOR ~ NEXT loop. The value
of D501 will be sent to D101 in the second loop. By the same process, the value of D509 will
be sent to D109 in the 10th loop.

z

When the executing time reaches its set value, which means F1 = K10, [SET M0] instruction
will be executed. The Normally Closed contact M0 will be activated to stop FOR ~ NEXT
loops.

z

The program performs the transferring of 10 parameters of each recipe. The numbers of
parameters can easily be changed by setting the executing times of FOR ~ NEXT loop.
Besides, if it requires adding more recipes, the program can also meet this requirement by
adding one more MOV instruction as [MOV K530 E1].

4-4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

4. Index Registers E, F Design Examples

4.3

Controlling Voltage Output of 2 DVP-04DA by 8 VRs (Variable Resistors)

DVP-F6VR

DVP-EH MPU

DVP04DA

DVP04DA

Control Purpose:
z

Controlling the voltage output of 2 DVP-04DA to vary from 0 ~ 10V by adjusting 8 VRs on
DVP-EH series PLC (2 VRs on the EH MPU and 6 VRs on DVP-F6VR extension unit).

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Start Switch of reading VR volume

X1

Writing in the value of the first DVP04DA

X2

Writing in the value of the second DVP04DA

E0

Index register

Control Program:
M1000
RST
FOR
X0

E0
K8

VRRD

K0@E0

INC

E0

D0E0

Reading out values of 8
VRs in order by [INC E0]
and FOR ~ NEXT loop

NEXT

DVP-PLC Application Examples

4-5

4. Index Registers E, F Design Examples
X0
MOV

D0

D10

MOV

D1

D20

MOV

D2

D30

MOV

D3

D40

MOV

D4

D50

MOV

D5

D60

MOV

D6

D70

MOV

D7

D80

DMUL

D10

K4000

D100

DDIV

D100

K255

D200

DMUL

D20

K4000

D110

DDIV

D110

K255

D210

DMUL

D30

K4000

D120

DDIV

D120

K255

D220

DMUL

D40

K4000

D130

DDIV

D130

K255

D230

DMUL

D50

K4000

D140

DDIV

D140

K255

D240

DMUL

D60

K4000

D150

DDIV

D150

K255

D250

X0
X0
X0
X0
X0

Sending the data in
D0 ~ D7 to D10 ~ D80
according ly

X0
X0
X0
Read out value
processing of
the 1st VR

X0
Read out value
processing of
the 2nd VR

X0
Read out value
processing of
the 3rd VR

X0
Read out value
processing of
the 4th VR

X0
Read out value
processing of
the 5th VR

X0

4-6

Read out value
processing of
the 6st VR

DVP-PLC Application Examples

4. Index Registers E, F Design Examples
X0
DMUL

D70

K4000

D160

DDIV

D160

K255

D260

DMUL

D80

K4000

D170

DDIV

D170

K255

D270

Read out value
processing of
the 8th VR

TO

K0

K6

D200

K1

TO

K0

K7

D210

K1

TO

K0

K8

D220

K1

TO

K0

K9

D230

K1

TO

K1

K6

D240

K1

TO

K1

K7

D250

K1

TO

K1

K8

D260

K1

TO

K1

K9

D270

K1

Read out value
processing of
the 7th VR

X0

X1

Controlling
0 ~10V output
from 4 channels
on the 1st DA
module

X2

Controlling
0 ~10V output
from 4 channels
on the 2nd DA
module

Program Description:
z

The program uses index register E0 and FOR ~ NEXT loop to specify the No. of VR as well
as the No. of D registers which store the read out value of VR.

z

In FOR ~ NEXT loop, E0 will change from 0 to 7 because of [INC E0] instruction. In this case,
K0@E0 will change from K0 to K7 and D0E0 will change from D0 to D7. Therefore, the
values of 8 VRs will be read out in order as below, VR0→D0, VR1→D1 … VR7→D7.

z

The value range of the VR is K0 ~ K255, and the voltage range of DVP04DA is 0 ~ 10V
corresponding to K0 ~ K4000. Therefore, the program is designed to convert the VR value
K0 ~ K255 into the DVP04DA value K0 ~ K4000. Through this process, the target of
controlling 0 ~ 10V voltage output by adjusting the VR value can be achieved.

z

The value which is converted into K0 ~ K4000 will be sent to D200, D210, D220 … D270,
and will be transferred to DVP04DA by TO instruction as the voltage outputs of the
corresponding channels.

z

For the application of API85 VRRD instruction and API79 TO instruction, please refer to
DVP-PLC Application Manual - programming.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

4-7

4. Index Registers E, F Design Examples
MEMO

4-8

DVP-PLC Application Examples

5. Loop Instruction Design Examples

5.1

Recipe Setting by CJ Instruction
Pulse Output

X1

Y10
C2
Y0
C0

Stroke 1

PLS
COM SIGN

X4

X2

Stroke 2

X3

Forward / Reverse

Stroke 3

DVP12SC
Delta ASDA Servo

Control Purpose:
z

Controlling 3 stroke distances of Delta ASDA servo by sending pulses from Delta DVP12SC
PLC. Users can choose the adequate stroke distance to meet the working requirement by
pressing 3 individual switches.

Devices:
Device

Function

X1

X1 = ON when the switch Stroke 1 is pressed.

X2

X2 = ON when the switch Stroke 2 is pressed.

X3

X3 = ON when the switch Stroke 3 is pressed.

X4

X4 = ON when the servo locating switch is pressed.

Y0

Pulse direction control

Y10

Pulse output point

Control Program:
X1
CJ

P1

CJ

P2

CJ

P3

CJ

P4

MOV

K10000

CJ

P4

X2

X3

M1000

M1000
P1

DVP-PLC Application Examples

D0

5-1

5. Loop Instruction Design Examples
M1000
P2

MOV

K20000

CJ

P4

MOV

K30000

CJ

P4

DDRVI

D0

CJ

P4

D0

M1000
P3

D0

X4
P4

K100000

Y10

Y0

Program Description:
z

When X1 = ON, X2 = OFF, X3 = OFF, the program will jump from [CJ P1] to P1 and store the
constant K10000 in D0, which means the first stroke distance is selected. At the same time,
the program will jump to address P4 and get ready to output pulses.

z

When X2 = ON, X1 = OFF, X3 = OFF, the program will jump from [CJ P2] to P2 and store the
constant K20000 in D0, which means the second stroke distance is selected. At the same
time, the program will jump to address P4 and get ready to output pulses.

z

When X3 = ON, X1 = OFF, X2 = OFF, the program will jump from [CJ P3] to P3 and store the
constant K30000 in D0, which means the third stroke distance is selected. At the same time,
the program will jump to address P4 and get ready to output pulses.

z

When X1 = OFF, X2 = OFF, X3 = OFF, [CJ p4] instruction will be executed. The program will
jump to pointer P4 directly and get ready to output pulses.

z

When X4 = ON, [DDRVI D0 K10000 Y10 Y0] instruction will be executed; that is, Y10 will
output a certain number of pulses with frequency of 100 KHz (the content in D0 is the
number of the pulses), and Y0 will control the pulse direction. Since the operating distance
of the servo motor is proportional to the number of the pulses, the object of controlling servo
operating distance can be achieved by setting PLC output pulses.

5-2

DVP-PLC Application Examples

5. Loop Instruction Design Examples
5.2

Reservoir Level Control
Y10 Y11

X0

Y1
Y0
X1

Control Purpose:
z

Enabling the abnormal situation alarm and draining water from the reservoir when the level
is above the upper bound.

z

Enabling the abnormal situation alarm and pouring water into the reservoir when the level is
below the lower bound.

z

Enabling the mechanical failure alarm if the upper bound sensor X0 is still ON after draining
water for 10 minutes.

z

Enabling the mechanical failure alarm if the lower bound sensor X1 is still ON after pouring
water for 5 minutes.

z

Resetting all the alarms and valves when the level is in normal position.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 turns ON when the level reaches the upper bound.

X1

X1 turns ON when the level reaches the lower bound.

Y0

Draining valve

Y1

Pouring valve

Y10

Abnormal situation alarm

Y11

Mechanical failure alarm

Control Program:
X0

X1
X1

X1
CALL

P0

CALL

P10

ZRST

Y0

Y1

ZRST

Y10

Y11

ZRST

T0

T1

X0
X0

FEND

DVP-PLC Application Examples

5-3

5. Loop Instruction Design Examples

P0

M1000

Y0
Y10

K6000

Subroutine for draining
water and enabling alarm
when the level is above
the upper bound.

K3000

Subroutine for pouring
water and enabing alarm
when the level is below
the lower bound.

Y0

T0

X0

TMR

T0

CALL

P20

SRET

P10

M1000

Y1
Y10
Y1

T1

X1

TMR

T1

CALL

P20

SRET

P20

M1000

Y11
SRET

Subroutine for enabling
mechanical failure alarm.

Program Description:
z

When the level is above the upper bound, X0 will be ON to execute [CALL P0] instruction.
The abnormal situation alarm Y10 and the draining valve Y0 will start working until the level
is below the upper bound.

z

When the level is below the lower bound, X1 will be ON to execute [CALL P10] instruction.
The abnormal situation alarm Y10 and the pouring valve Y1 will start working until the level
is above the lower bound.

z

CALL P20 subroutine is nested both in P0 and P10 subroutines. If the upper bound sensor is
still on after draining water for 10 minutes, subroutine P20 will be executed. Coil Y11 will be
ON and the mechanical failure alarm will be enabled.

z

Likewise, if the lower bound sensor is still ON after pouring water for 5 minutes, subroutine
P20 will be executed. Coil Y11 will be ON and the mechanical failure alarm will be enabled.

z

If the level is at normal position, X0 = OFF, X1 = OFF, ZRST instruction will be executed. Y0,
Y1, Y10, Y11, T0, and T1 will be reset. All valves as well as alarms will be disabled.

5-4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

5. Loop Instruction Design Examples
5.3

Fire Alarm in the Office (Interruption Application)

Control Purpose:
z

Starting the alarm and sprayer when the temperature alarm detects high temperature.

z

Stopping the alarm and sprayer when the alarm reset button is pressed.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Temperature alarm. X0 = ON when the temperature is too high.

X1

Alarm reset button. X1 = ON when the button is pressed.

Y0

Sprayer

Y1

Fire alarm

Control Program:
EI

Main Program
FEND
M1000
I001

Y0
Y1
IRET
M1000

I101

RST

Y0

RST

Y1

IRET

Program Description:
z

In the program, the interruption pointers I001, I101 correspond to the external input points
X0, X1. When X0, X1 is ON, the subroutines corresponding to I001, I101 will be executed.

z

If the temperature in the office is normal, X0 = OFF. The temperature alarm will not perform
any action. No interruption signal is generated, and no interruption subroutine will be
executed in this case.

z

If the temperature in the office is too high, X0 = ON, the temperature alarm will be enabled.
The PLC will stop the main program to execute the interruption subroutine I001. In this case,
sprayer valve Y0 and alarm Y1 will be enabled. After the execution of I001, the program will
return to the main program and resume execution from the interruption point.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

5-5

5. Loop Instruction Design Examples
z

Press the alarm reset button if the alarm situation is cleared. X1 = ON, the PLC will stop the
main program to execute the interruption subroutine I101. In this case, sprayer Y0 and
alarm Y1 will be shut down. After the execution of I101, the program will return to the main
program and resume execution from the interruption point.

5-6

DVP-PLC Application Examples

5. Loop Instruction Design Examples

5.4

Auto Lock up system in the Supermarket (FOR ~ NEXT)

X0
TOTALD
Yuan
TOTAL:
41: .41.2
2 Yuan

TOTAL: 88.00 Yuan

CHANGE
: 8.8
Yuan
CHANGE
:8
. 8Yuan

CHANGE : 12.00 Yuan

CHANGE : 33.2 Yuan

Y20~Y37

Y0~Y17

Y40~ Y57

Control Purpose:
z

Once fire or robbery happened in the supermarket, locking up all cash drawers until the
alarm situation is cleared.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 = ON when the alarm is activated.

D0

The number of cash drawers

D10

Start address of destination register

Control Program:
M1000
RST

F1

MOV

K3

FOR

D0

MOV

HFFFF

INC

F1

MOV

H0

INC

F1

M1002
D0

X0
D10F1

X0
D10F1

NEXT
DVP-PLC Application Examples

5-7

5. Loop Instruction Design Examples
M1000
MOV

D10

K4Y0

MOV

D11

K4Y20

MOV

D12

K4Y40

Program Description:
z

The execution times of FOR~NEXT loop which decide the number of controlled cash
counters can be controlled by the value in D0. Each cash counter has 16 drawers. In this
program, D0 = K3, which means it can control 48 cash drawers in 3 counters.

z

F10 = K0, D10F1 represents D10; F10 = K1, D10F1 represents D11; F0 = K2, D10F1
represents D12; F0=K3, D10F1 represents D13.

z

When the alarm rings, X0 = ON. FOR ~ NEXT loop will be executed for 3 times and HFFFF
will be sent to D10 ~ D12 in order. After the execution, the value in D10 ~ D12 will be sent to
the external outputs. All the outputs Y will be set to be ON in this case. The system will lock
up all the cash drawers.

z

When the alarm situation is cleared, X0 = OFF. FOR ~ NEXT loop will be executed for 3
times and H0 will be sent to D10 ~ D12 in order. After the execution, the value in D10 ~ D12
will be sent to the external outputs. All the outputs Y will be reset to be OFF in this case. The
system will unlock all the cash drawers.

z

In this program, the index register F1 is used for storing single value in a data stack (series
D registers). According to different application situations, users can make use of the data
stack for controlling timers or counters.

5-8

DVP-PLC Application Examples

6. Data Transmission and Comparison Design Examples

6.1

CMP - Material Mixing Machine

Control Purpose:
z

There are materials A and B in the mixing machine. Enabling the indicator(Y0) when the
Power On switch is pressed. Controlling the material A outlet (Y1) to start feeding and
starting the agitator Y3 by pressing the button Process(X1). When material A feeding
process reaches the set time D0, enabling the material B outlet(Y2) to start feeding while the
agitator keeps working. Stopping all processes when the whole mixing time(D1) is achieved.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 = ON when the Power On switch is pressed.

X1

X1 = ON when the button Process is pressed.

Y0

Power On Indicator

Y1

Material A outlet

Y2

Material B outlet

Y3

Agitator

D0

Feeding time of material A

D1

Total feeding time of material A and B

Control Program:
X0
Y0
X1
SET

Y3

TMR

T0

D1

CMP

D0

T0

ZRST

Y1

Y3

RST

T0

Y3

M0

M0
Y1
M1
Y2
M2

T0

DVP-PLC Application Examples

6-1

6. Data Transmission and Comparison Design Examples
Program Description:
z

When the Power On switch is pressed, X0 = ON. The Power On indicator Y0 will be ON. .

z

When Process button is pressed, X1 = ON. SET Y3 instruction will be executed so as to
execute TMR instruction. Timer T0 will be activated in this case.

z

At the same time, CMP instruction will also be executed. When the PV(present value) in T0
is smaller than the SV(set value) in D0, M0 = ON. Therefore, M0 will be ON to turn on coil Y1.
Material A feeding process will start. However, when the PV in T0 ≥ the SV in D0, M1 and
M2 will be ON but M0 will be OFF. Y2 will be ON in this case and the material B feeding
process will start while process A is stopped.

z

When the PV in T0 reaches the SV in D1, the NO(Normally Open) contact T0 will be ON to
execute ZRST and RST instructions. Y1, Y2, Y3 and T0 will be reset, and the agitator will
stop until the Process button is pressed again.

6-2

DVP-PLC Application Examples

6. Data Transmission and Comparison Design Examples

6.2

ZCP - Water Level Alarm Control

Control Purpose:
z

Controlling the water level in water tower by using analogue level measuring instrument.
When the water is at normal level, enable the normal level indicator. When there is only 25%

water volume in the water tower, start the feed water valve. When the level reaches the upper
bound, enable the alarm and stop the feed water valve.
Devices:
Device

Function

Y0

Feed water valve. ( The lower bound value = K1000)

Y1

Normal level indicator

Y2

Upper limit alarm. ( The upper bound value = K4000)

D0

Data register of the measuring value(K0~K4000)

Control Program:
M1000
FROM

K0

K6

D0

K1

ZCP

K1000

K4000

D0

M0

SET

Y0

M0

M1
Y1
M2
Y2
RST

Y0

Program Description:
z

The water level is measured by analogue level measuring instrument(Voltage output of
0~10V). Delta DVP04AD extension module converts the measured value into the value of
K0~K4000 and judges the water level by the value saved in D0

z

When the value in D0 < K1000(25% water volume), M0 = ON to set the feed water valve Y0.

z

When the value is between K1000~K4000, M1 = ON to set the normal level indicator Y1.

z

When the value > K4000(the level reaches the upper bound), M2 = ON to set the upper limit
alarm Y2. At the same time, Y0 will be reset, and the feed water valve will be shut down.

z

For the application of API78 FROM instruction, please refer to DVP-PLC Application
Manual – Programming.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

6-3

6. Data Transmission and Comparison Design Examples

6.3

BMOV - Multiple History Data Backup

Control Purpose:
z

Recording the data of the DUT(Device Under Test) in register D0~D99 on the experimental
test bed first, then backup the data in other registers every 30 min by DVP-PLC so that
registers D0~D99 can compile new data again. The test cycle of DUT is 2 hours.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 turns ON when START is pressed.

X1

X1 turns ON when RETEST is pressed.

X2

X2 turns ON when STOP is pressed.

D0~D99

Data compiling

D100~D499

Data backup

Control Program:
X0

X1

X2

T0
TMR

T0

K18000

CNT

C0

K4

T0

X1

LD=

C0

K1

BMOVP

D0

D100

K100

LD=

C0

K2

BMOVP

D0

D200

K100

LD=

C0

K3

BMOVP

D0

D300

K100

LD=

C0

K4

BMOVP

D0

D400

K100

RST

C0

X2

Program Description:
z

When X0 = ON, T0 starts to count up, and the NO contact T0 will be ON every 30 minutes.

z

In the program, counter C0 is used for counting the ON times of NO contact T0. When C0 =
1, the data in D0~D99 will be sent to D100~D199; when C0 = 2, the data in D0~D99 will be
sent to D200~D299; when C0 = 3, the data in D0~D99 will be sent to D300~D399; when C0
= 4, the data in D0~D99 will be sent to D400~D499 and the test process ends here.

z

If the operator needs to retest the DUT, just activate X1 one more time.

z

When X2 = ON, the test will be stopped. In this case, no data compiling will be done on DUT
by PLC, and Counter C0 will be cleared as well.

6-4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

6. Data Transmission and Comparison Design Examples
6.4

FMOV - Single Data Broadcasting
X2
X3
30Hz 40Hz
X4
X1
0Hz 50Hz
Frequency Selection
RS485

1# ACMD

2# ACMD

3# ACMD

4# ACMD

Control Purpose:
z

Setting frequency of 4 ACMDs (AC Motor Drive) by selecting on the rotary switch.
In some applications users may need to set the frequency on several ACMDs to be the same

when a Delta PLC is connected through RS485 communication format. The control purpose can
be achieved by controlling the value in D10~D13 which corresponds to 4 frequency of four
ACMDs, and then adjusting the frequency by one external rotary switch.
Devices:
Device

Function

X1

X1 = ON when the switch is turned to “0Hz”.

X2

X2 = ON when the switch is turned to “30Hz”.

X3

X3 = ON when the switch is turned to “40Hz”.

X4

X4 = ON when the switch is turned to “50Hz”.

D10

Output frequency of 1# AC motor drive

D11

Output frequency of 2# AC motor drive

D12

Output frequency of 3# AC motor drive

D13

Output frequency of 4# AC motor drive

DVP-PLC Application Examples

6-5

6. Data Transmission and Comparison Design Examples
Control Program:
X1

FMOV

K0

D10

K4

FMOV

K3000

D10

K4

FMOV

K4000

D10

K4

FMOV

K5000

D10

K4

MODWR

K1

H2001

D10

MODWR

K2

H2001

D11

MODWR

K3

H2001

D12

MODWR

K4

H2001

D13

X2
X3
X4

M0
M1
M2
M3

Controlling the frequency
of AC motor drive through
RS485 communication format
( Part of the whole program)

program Description:
z

When X1 = ON, K0 will be sent to D10~D13. The output frequency of ACMD will be 0Hz.

z

When X2 = ON, K3000 will be sent to D10~D13. The output frequency of ACMD will be
30Hz.

z

When X3 =ON, K4000 will be sent to D10~D13. The output frequency of ACMD will be
40Hz.

z

When X4 = ON, K5000 will be sent to D10~D13. The output frequency of ACMD will be
50Hz.

z

The program applies MODWR instructions to set output frequency of ACMDs through
RS485 communication. Please note that the 4 MODWR instructions cannot be executed at
the same time due to a possible conflict in communication. For examples of multiple
communication, please refer to Chapter 12 – Communication Design Examples.

6-6

DVP-PLC Application Examples

6. Data Transmission and Comparison Design Examples

6.5

CML - Color Lights Flashing

Y13 Y12

Y11 Y10

Y15

ON

Y7

Y16
Y17

Y0

Y1

Y2

Y3

Y4

X1
Y6

OFF

Y5

Control Purpose:
z

Turning on the even-numbered lights and odd-numbered lights alternately for 1 sec when
the switch is turned ON.

z

Turning off all color lights when the switch is turned off.

Devices:
Device
X1

Function
Flashing control switch. X1 = ON when the switch is turned to ON.

M1013

1s clock pulse, 0.5s ON / 0.5s OFF

Y0~Y17

16 color lights

Control Program:
X1
MOV

H5555

K4Y0

MOV

H0

K4Y0

CMLP

K4Y0

K4Y0

X1
X1 M1013

Program Description:
z

When the switch is turned ON, K4Y0 = H5555 and the state of Y17~Y0 will be “0101 0101
0101 0101,” which means the even-numbered lights will be ON. When M1013 = On, CMLP
instruction will be executed to reverse the state of K4Y0. Y17~Y0 will be “1010 1010 1010
1010,” which means the odd-numbered lights will be ON. The state will last for 1 sec.

z

When M1013 is ON again, CMLP instruction will be executed and the state of K4Y0 will be
reversed again. In this case, the even-numbered lights will be ON.

z

Every time when M1013 is ON, the state of Y0~Y17 will be reversed and lasts for 1 sec. The
lights will flash alternatively as this cycle.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

6-7

6. Data Transmission and Comparison Design Examples

6.6

XCH - Exchanging the Upper and Lower 8 bits in a Register

Control Purpose:
z

Exchanging the data NB(Nibble)0 with NB1, NB2 with NB3 in a register every 1 sec.

The data length of D register is Word (16 bits), and a Word is made up of 4 Nibbles.
NB3

NB2

b14 b13 B12 b11 b10 b9

NB0

NB1
b8

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

D0=H5678 (Before exchange)
H5

NB3

H6

H7

NB2

b14 b13 B12 b11 b10 b9

H8

NB1
b8

b7

b6

b5

NB0
b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

D0=H6587 (After exchange)
H6

H5

H8

H7

Devices:
Device

Function

T0

1 sec timer. Time base: 100ms

D0

Data register

Y0~Y17

Storing 4 nibbles

Control Program:
M1002
MOV

H5678

D0

MOV

D0

K4Y0

TMR

T0

K10

XCHP

K1Y0

K1Y4

XCHP

K1Y10

K1Y14

MOVP

K4Y0

T0
T0

D0

Program Description:
z

First, the program will store the 16 bits ( 4 Nibbles) data in D0 to Y0~Y17. After 1 sec, the
NO contact T0 will be activated to execute XCHP instruction. The data in K1Y0 will be
exchanged with K1Y4 and so will K1Y10 with K1Y14. Then, these data will be sent to D0.
Finally, The data exchange between NB0/NB1 and NB2/NB3 is completed.

6-8

DVP-PLC Application Examples

6. Data Transmission and Comparison Design Examples
6.7

DIP Switch Input and 7-segment Display Output

Equivalent circuit of
DVP-F8ID extension card

DVP-F8ID

DI0
DI1
DI2

8421

DI3
DI4
DI5

8421

DVP-EH MPU
Y7~Y4

DI6
DI7

Y3~Y0

Display Range:K0~K99

M1104
M1105
M1106
M1107
M1108
M1109
M1110
M1111

Input Range:K0~K99

Control Purpose:
z

Setting the set value of counter C0 in the range of K0~K99 by DVP-F8ID extension card and
displaying the PV (K0~K99) by 7-segment decoding display.

Devices:
Device
X0
M1104~M1111
D0
Y0~Y7
Y10

Function
Switch for starting C0
Mapping ON/OFF state of the external 8 switches
Set value of C0
Displaying the PV of C0
Indicator. Y10 = ON when the counter reached its set value

Control Program:
M1000

BIN

K2M1104

D0

BCD

D0

K2Y0

CNT

C0

D0

BCD

C0

K2Y0

X0
X0

C0
Y10

Program Description:
z

When PLC runs, ON/OFF state of the external 8 DIP switches will be mapped to PLC
internal auxiliary relay M1104~M1111 by DVP-F8ID extension card. 8 bits switch can
perform 2 digit number input by instructions.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

6-9

6. Data Transmission and Comparison Design Examples
z

When the program is executed, M1000 = ON, and the set value of counter in DVP-F8ID
extension card will be stored in D0.

z

When the counter is OFF, X0 = OFF, and the 2 digit number display will show the set value
of C0 because of the execution of BCD instruction.

z

When the counter is ON, X0 = ON. C0 will start counting and BCD instruction will be
executed. The 2 digit number display will show the PV of C0.

z

If the 2 digit number display shows “34” from left to right, it means the state of DI7~DI0 on
DVP-F8ID extension card is “0011 0100.”

z

6-10

When C0 reaches its set value D0, the NO contact C0 will be activated and Y10 will be ON.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

7. Elementary Arithmetic Operations Design Examples

7.1

Accurate Pipe Flow Measurement

r

Cross-sectional area of the pipe
2
2
S=πr =π(d/2)

d

Control Purpose:
z

Measuring the flow to an accuracy of 2 decimal places.
In this example, the diameter of the pipe is measured by mm, the flow rate is measured by

dm/s, and the flow is measured by cm3/s. The cross-sectional area of the pipe = πr2 = π(d/2)2 and
the flow = cross-sectional area × flow rate.
Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Starting the measurement

D0

Diameter of the pipe (unit: mm; set value: 10mm)

D6

Operation result of the cross-sectional area (unit: mm2)

D10

Flow rate (unit: dm/s; set value: 25dm/s)

D20

Operation result of the flow (unit: mm3/s)

D30

Operation result of the flow (unit: cm3/s)

Control Program:
M1002
MOV

X0

K10

D0
Set value of pipe diameter
and the flow rate

MOV

K25

D10

MUL

D0

D0

D2

MUL

K314

D2

D4

Calculation of the

cross-sectional area

DVP-PLC Application Examples

DDIV

D4

K4

D6

DMUL

D6

D10

D20

Total Flow (mm3 /s )

DDIV

D20

K1000

D30

Total Flow (cm 3 /s )

7-1

7. Elementary Arithmetic Operations Design Examples
Program Description:
z

The floating point operation is usually applied to perform decimal calculation. However, it
needs to be converted and is more complicated. Therefore, we use elementary arithmetic
operation instructions to perform decimal calculation in this example.

z

The units of mm, cm and dm are used in the program. For calculation requirement, the
program sets these units into mm3 and then converts them into cm3.

z

π (π≈3.14) is required when calculating the cross-sectional area of the pipe. In order to get
the calculation accuracy of 2 decimal places, the program increases π 100 times to be K314
instead of increasing the unit dm/s 100 times to be mm/s.

z

In the end, the program divides the value in D20 (unit: mm3/s) with 1000 so as to convert the
unit into cm3/s. (1 cm3 = 1 ml, 1l = 1000 ml = 1000 cm3 = 1 dm3 )

z

.Assume the pipe diameter D0 is 10 mm and the flow rate D10 is 25 dm/s, the operation
result of the total flow will be 196 cm3/s.

7-2

DVP-PLC Application Examples

7. Elementary Arithmetic Operations Design Examples

7.2

INC/DEC - Fine Tuning by JOG Control

Control Purpose:
z

Controlling the fine tuning by JOG left and JOG right switches.
In this assumed position control system, the 1 mm fine tuning can be performed by 100

pulses sent by PLC. When X0 is pressed, JOG left for 1 mm; when X1 is pressed, JOG right for 1
mm.
Devices:
Device

Function

X0

JOG left switch

X1

JOG right switch

D0

Target position

D2

The number of pulses for target position

Y0

Pulse output point

Y5

Direction control signal output

Control Program:
X0

DINC

D0

DDEC

D0

MUL

D0

K100

DMOV

D2

D4

SET

M1

DDRVA

D4

RST

M1

RST

M1029

X1
M1000

LD<>

D2

D4

D2

M1
K50000

Y0

Y5

M1029

Program Description:
z

When JOG left switch X0 is pressed, DINC instruction will execute to increase the value in
D0; when JOG right switch X1 is pressed, DDEC instruction will execute to decrease the
value in D0.

z

Assume the initial value of D0 and D4 is K0. When JOG left switch is pressed, D0 will be K1

DVP-PLC Application Examples

7-3

7. Elementary Arithmetic Operations Design Examples
and then be multiplied with 100 as the pulse number. The pulse number will be stored in D2
then transferred to D4 as the target value of DDRVA instruction (absolute position), and M1
will be ON to execute DDRVA instruction.
z

According to the execution result of DDRVA, Y0 will output 100 pulses with frequency 50kHz
and the system will JOG to the target position (D4 = D2 = K100) from the initial position (D4
= K0), which means the system will JOG left for 1 mm.

z

If X0 is pressed again, D2 will be K200 which is different to the present value in D4 (K100).
The value in D2 (K200) will be sent to D4 as the target value of the absolute position. M1 will
be ON to execute DDRVA instruction. The system will JOG to the target position (D4 = D2 =
K200) from the last position (D4 = K100), which means the system will JOG left for another 1
mm.

z

Likewise, the process of JOG right is similar to that of JOG left. The system will JOG right for
1 mm every time the JOG right switch is pressed,

7-4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

7. Elementary Arithmetic Operations Design Examples

7.3

NEG - Displacement Reverse Control
X1
Reverse START

K-50000
(D200,D201)

Origin(K0)
(D200,D201 )

K50000
(D200,D201)

Control Purpose:
z

The symmetric point in this program is the Origin (D200, D201 = K0). Controlling the
displacement to shift between the left end and the right end every time X1 is pressed.

Devices:
Device

Function

X1

Reverse START button

Y0

Pulse output point

Y5

Reverse direction control

D200, D201

Storing the target value of the absolute position

Control Program:
X1
DNEG

D200

SET

M0

DDRVA

D200

RST

M0

M0
K5000

Y0

Y5

M1029

Program Description:
z

Assume the 32-bit initial value of D200 and D201 is K50000. When the Reverse START
button X1 is pressed, the content in D200 and D201 will become K-50000.

z

In addition, M0 will be ON to execute DDRVA instruction. The program will shift the present
location K50000 to the target position K-50000 with frequency 5KHZ (K5000). When the
target position is reached, M1029 = ON and M0 will be reset. Y0 will stop pulse sending.

z

When X1 is pressed again, the value in D200 and D201 will change from K-50000 to
K50000. M0 will be ON to execute the displacement reverse control until the absolute
position is reached.

z

As the actions above, the program will shift from the present location to the other side of the
symmetric point Origin every time when X1 is pressed.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

7-5

7. Elementary Arithmetic Operations Design Examples
MEMO

7-6

DVP-PLC Application Examples

8. Rotation and Shift Design Examples

8.1

ROL/ROR - Neon Lamp Design

Y1

Y0

Y2

Y3

Y4

Y5

Y6

Y7

X0 Right
X1 Left

Y10

Y11 Y12

Y13

Y14

Y15

Y16

Y17

X2 Reset

Control Purpose:
z

Enabling the 16 neon lamps in the order: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17 when Rotation Right button is
pressed. Each lamp turns on for 200ms.

z

Enabling the 16 neon lamps in the order: Y17~Y10, Y7~Y0 when Rotation Left button is
pressed. Each lamp turns on for 200ms.

z

The action of Reset is unnecessary when switching between Rotation Right and Rotation
Left.

z

When RESET is pressed, turn off all working neon lamps.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Rotation Right button. X0 = ON when the button is pressed.

X1

Rotation Left button. X1 = ON when the button is pressed.

X2

X2 turns ON when RESET is pressed.

T0/T1
Y0~Y17

200ms timer. Time base: 100ms.
16 neon lamps

Control Program:
X0

T0

ZRST

Y0

Y17

ZRST

M10

M11

SET

Y0

SET

M10

TMR

T0

K2

ROL

K4Y0

K1

RST

T0

Enabling the neon lamps
in the order: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17.
Each lamp for 200ms.

M10

T0

DVP-PLC Application Examples

8-1

8. Rotation and Shift Design Examples
X1

T1

ZRST

Y0

Y17

ZRST

M10

M11

SET

Y17

SET

M11

TMR

T1

K2

ROR

K4Y1

K1

RST

T1

ZRST

Y0

Enabling the neon lamps
in the order: Y17~Y10, Y7~Y0.
Each lamp for 200ms.

M11

T1

X2
Y17
Reset
ZRST

M10

M11

Program Description:
z

When Rotation Right is pressed, X0 = ON to execute ZRST and SET instructions. Y0~Y17
and M10~M11 will be reset first, then Y0 and M10 will be ON. TMR instruction will be
executed. After 200ms, the contact T0 will be activated once to execute ROL instruction.
The ON state of Y0 will be shifted to Y1, and T0 will then be reset.

z

In the next scan cycle, timer T0 starts counting again. After 200ms, ROL instruction will be
executed one more time and the ON state of Y1 will be shifted to Y2. By the same process,
Y0~Y17 will be ON for 200ms in order.

z

The rotation left process is similar to the above process. However, the rotation right program
uses ROR instruction to enable the lamps in the order: Y17~Y10, Y7~Y0

z

When RESET is pressed, X2 = ON to reset Y0~Y17 and M10~M11. All neon lamps will be
OFF. (Note: in this program, the purpose of placing ZRST instruction after the rising-edge
contacts of X0 and X1 is to ensure that all the neon lamps start flashing from Y0 or Y17.)

8-2

DVP-PLC Application Examples

8. Rotation and Shift Design Examples

8.2

SFTL - Defective Product Detect
Photoelectric sensor X0
for detecting defective product

X6
RESET
Electromagnetic valve
pushing pole Y0

P hotoelectric sensor X 5
for detecting the falling
of defective products

P hotoelectric sensor X4
for monitoring the cam

Recycle box for defective product

Control Purpose:
z

Detecting the defective products (taller than normal dimension) on the conveyor belt by
photoelectric sensor and pushing them into the recycle box at the 5th position.
The pushing pole will be reset when the falling of defective product is detected. When errors

occur, the disorder memory can be cleared and the system can be restarted by pressing RESET.
Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Photoelectric sensor for detecting defective products

X4

Photoelectric sensor for monitoring the cam

X5

Photoelectric sensor for detecting the falling of defective products

X6

RESET

Y0

Electromagnetic valve pushing pole

Control Program:
X4
SFTL

X0

SET

Y0

RST

Y0

RST

M4

ZRST

M0

M0

K5

K1

M4
X5

X6

DVP-PLC Application Examples

M4

8-3

8. Rotation and Shift Design Examples
Program Description:
z

Every time the cam rotates once, the product will be moved from one position to another
position. X4 will be activated to execute SFTL instruction once. The content in M0~M4 will
be shift to left for one bit and the state of X0 will be sent to M0.

z

When X0 = ON (defective products detected), the value “1” will be sent to M0 and achieve
the 5th position after 4 times of shift. In this case, M4 = ON and the electromagnetic valve Y0
will be ON to push the defective product into the recycle box.

z

When the falling of the defective product is detected, X5 will be activated to execute [RST
Y0] and [RST M4] instructions. Y0 and M4 will be reset. The electromagnetic valve will be
OFF till next defective product is detected.

z

When RESET is pressed, X6 will be activated to reset M0~M4, so as to ensure that the
system restart the detecting process when the memory which records defective products is
in disorder.

8-4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

8. Rotation and Shift Design Examples

8.3

WSFL - Automatic Sorting Mixed Products
X7
RESET

Electromagnetic valve A
Y0
X1
X0

Electromagnetic valve B
Y1

Electromagnetic valve C
Y2

X2

Position1 Position2

Photoelectric sensor X6
for monitoring the cam

Position3

Position4

X3

Container A

Position5 Position6

X4

Container B

X5

Container C

Control Purpose:
z

Sorting different products on the conveyor belt and pushing each product into its
corresponding container.

1.

There are three kinds of products, A, B and C and 6 positions for each product are set on the
conveyor. Products will move forward for one position when the cam rotates once.

2.

Sorting each product by product ID (Identification) sensors. Product A will be pushed in container
A at position 2. And so forth, product B in container B at position 4; product C in container C at
position 6.

3.

When the product falling is confirmed by sensors, the electromagnetic valve will be reset. When
RESET is pressed, all memory will be cleared and the system will restart the identifying and
sorting process.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Product A ID sensor. X0 = ON when Product A is detected.

X1

Product B ID sensor. X1 = ON when Product B is detected.

X2

Product C ID sensor. X2 = ON when Product C is detected.

X3

Product A falling sensor. X3 = ON when Product A falls in container A

X4

Product B falling sensor. X4 = ON when Product B falls in container B

X5

Product C falling sensor. X5 = ON when Product C falls in container C

X6

Sensor for the cam. X6 activates 1 time when the cam rotates once.

X7

RESET. X7 = ON when the button is pressed

Y0

Electromagnetic valve A

Y1

Electromagnetic valve B

Y2

Electromagnetic valve C

DVP-PLC Application Examples

8-5

8. Rotation and Shift Design Examples
Control Program:
X0
X1
X2
X6

M11 X3
M21 X4
M31 X5
X3

X4

X5

X7

MOVP

K1

D0

Product A is identified

MOVP

K2

D0

Product B is identified

MOVP

K3

D0

WSFL

D0

D100

Product C is identified
Data in D100~D105 will shift
left for one register
K6
K1
when the cam rotates once

CMP

D101

K1

M10

Confirming product A
at position 2

CMP

D103

K2

M20

Confirming product B
at positoin 4

CMP

D105

K3

M30

Confirming product C
at position 6

RST

D0

SET

Y0

Enable electromagnetic valve
if product A is confirmed.

SET

Y1

Enabling electromagnetic valve B
if product B is ocnfirmed.

SET

Y2

Enabling electromagnetic valve C
if product C is confirmed.

RST

M11

RST

Y0

RST

M21

RST

Y1

RST

M31

RST

Y2
D100

Reset electromagnetic valve A
when falling of product A is detected.

Reset electromagnetic valve B
when falling of product B is detected.

Reset electromagnetic valve C
when falling of product C is detected.

D105

Reset the system and
clear all the data memory.

Program Description:
z

When product A is identified on the conveyor belt, X0 activates for one time to execute
MOVP K1 D0 instruction. The value in D0 = K1. Likewise, when product B and C is on the
conveyor, the value in D0 will be K2 and K3.

z

Products will move forward for one position when the cam rotates once. X6 activated one
time to execute WSFL instruction. Data in D100~D105 will shift left for one register. At the

8-6

DVP-PLC Application Examples

8. Rotation and Shift Design Examples
same time, CMP instructions will be executed to confirm product A at position 2 (D101),
product B at position 4 (D103) and product C at position 6 (D105). After each CMP
instruction, RST instruction will be executed to clear D0.
z

If product A , B or C is confirmed at position 2, 4 or 6, the corresponding M11, M21 or M31
will be ON to enable electromagnetic valve A, B or C to push the products in the containers.

z

When the falling of each product is detected by sensors, X3, X4 or X5 will be ON to reset
electromagnetic valve A, B or C.

z

When RESET is pressed, X7 = ON to execute ZRST instruction. The value in D100~D105
will be 0, which means all data memory will be cleared.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

8-7

8. Rotation and Shift Design Examples

8.4

SFWR/SFRD - Room Service Call Control
R oom 101

Room N O.

Room102

D11

X1

X0
Amount of calling

X5

D0

R oom 103

Room 104

R oom 105

X2

X3

X4

X6
C HECK

RESET

Service Counter

Rooms

Control Purpose:
z

Recording the calling room numbers and the amount of calling then checking the numbers in
first-in first-out principle, which means the room first called will be first served.

z

Clearing all the data memory when RESET is pressed.

The amount of calling will be increased by the pressing times of call buttons, and decreased by
the checking times of CHECK button. If all room numbers are checked, the displayed amount of
calling would be 0.
Devices:
Device
X0

Call button of Room 101. X0 = ON when the button is pressed

X1

Call button of Room 102. X1 = ON when the button is pressed

X2

Call button of Room 103. X2 = ON when the button is pressed

X3

Call button of Room 104. X3 = ON when the button is pressed

X4

Call button of Room 105. X4 = ON when the button is pressed

X5

Check button. X5 = ON when CHECK is pressed.

X6

Reset button. X6 = ON when RESET is pressed.

D0

Displaying the amount of calls

D1 ~ D5

8-8

Function

Storing the room numbers under check

D10

Storing the input room numbers temporarily

D11

Displaying the room number (First-in first-out)

DVP-PLC Application Examples

8. Rotation and Shift Design Examples
Control Program:
X0
MOV

K101

D10

Send the Room No. 101 to D10

MOV

K102

D10

Send the Room No. 102 to D10

MOV

K103

D10

Send the Room No. 103 to D10

MOV

K104

D10

Send the Room No. 104 to D10

MOV

K105

D10

Send the Room No. 105 to D10

SFWR

D10

D0

K6

SFRD

D0

D11

K6

ZRST

D0

D5

RST

D11

X1
X2
X3
X4
X0
X1

Send the value in D10 to
registers specified
by D0 (D1~D5)

X2
X3
X4
X5
X6

Display the value (Room NO.)
according to registers
specified by D0 (D1~D5)

When X6 is activated, the value
in D0~D5 and D11 will be cleared.

Program Description:
z

By using API38 SFWR instruction together with API39 SFRD instruction, the program
performs data stack writing and reading control in FIFO(first in, first out) principle. In this
example, the room number first called will be first checked.

z

When Call buttons are pressed, the numbers of the five rooms will be stored in D10 first and
then sent to data stack D1~D5 according to the time order.

z

When CHECK is pressed, the room number first called will be read to D11 first and the
amount of calling will be decreased corresponding to D0. In addition, by using Delta TP04,
the system can easily monitor the value of D0 (Amount of calling) and D11 (Displaying
Room No.)

z

The program clears D0~D5 and D11 by ZRST and RST instructions, which means Amount
of calling and Room number displayed on TP04 will be 0.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

8-9

8. Rotation and Shift Design Examples

MEMO

8-10

DVP-PLC Application Examples

9. Data Processing Design Examples

9.1 ENCO/DECO - Encoding and Decoding

U
p

R
g
i ht

Pgn
D
D
w
o
n

AL ARM
R S- 232
R S- 485
U
p
PgU
p

Lef
t

R
g
i ht

Pgn
D
D
w
o
n

AL ARM
R S- 232
R S- 485
U
p
PgU
p

Lef
t

R
g
i ht

Pgn
D
D
w
o
n

AL ARM
R S- 232
R S- 485
U
p
PgU
p

Lef
t

R
g
i ht

Pgn
D
D
w
o
n

AL ARM

X3

X2

No. 0 sub - production line

R S- 485

No. 1 sub - production line

AL ARM
R S- 232

PgU
p

Lef
t

No. 2 sub - production line

R
g
i ht

Pgn
D
D
w
o
n

No. 3 sub - production line

No. 4 sub - production line

No. 5 sub - production line

No. 6 sub - production line

No. 7 sub - production line

AL ARM
R S- 232
R S- 485

U
p
PgU
p

Lef
t

R S- 232
R S- 485
U
p
PgU
p

Lef
t

R
g
i ht

Pgn
D
D
w
o
n

X7

X6

X5

X4

X1

X0

AL ARM
R S- 232
R S- 485
U
p
PgU
p

Lef
t

R
g
i ht

Pgn
D
D
w
o
n

Main production line
Control Purpose:
z

Monitoring the entering products from sub-production lines No.0~7 to main production line
by the value in D0 and disabling certain sub-production lines by setting the value in D10 as
K0~K7.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0~X7

Product detecting sensor to identify each entering product.

Y0~Y7

Disabling the corresponding sub production line (No.0~7)

M10

Executing ENCO instruction

M11

Executing DECO instruction

D0

Indicating the entering product from sub-production line No.0~7

D10

Disabling the specified sub-production line

DVP-PLC Application Examples

9-1

9. Data Processing Design Examples
Control Program:
M10
ENCO

X0

D0

K3

DECO

D10

Y0

K3

ZRST

Y0

Y7

MOV

HFFFF

D10

M11

M11

LD>

D10

K7

LD<

D10

K0

Program Description:
z

When M10 = ON, ENCO instruction will be executed. Any product entering main production
line will be encoded with its sub-production line number, and the result will be saved in D0.
By monitoring the value in D0, the operator can identify the type of the entering product.

z

When M11 = ON, DECO instruction will be executed to decode the specified value in D10
into Y0~Y7 so as to disable the corresponding sub-production line. For example, when D10
= K5, the decoding result will be Y5 = ON. In this case, No. 5 sub-production line will be
disabled. When M11 = OFF, ZRST instruction will be executed and Y0~Y7 will be OFF. All
sub-production lines will operate normally.

z

If the set value in D10 is out of the range between K0~K7, HFFFF will be written in D10, so
as to prevent the production line interruption due to other written value in D10.

9-2

DVP-PLC Application Examples

9. Data Processing Design Examples

9.2 SUM/BON - Checking and Counting the Number of “1”
Control Purpose:
When X0 = ON,
z

Executing SUM instruction to count active bits among Y0~Y17 and to store the value in D0.

z

Executing BON instruction to check the ON/OFF state of LSB (Least Significant Bit) and
MSB (Most Significant Bit) and to store the result in M0 and M1

z

Indicating the value in D0 and the state of M0 and M1.

Devices:
Device
X0
Y0~Y17

Function
Executing SUM and BON instructions
Device for checking and counting

D0

Storing the sum of active bits among Y0~Y17

M0

Storing the ON/OFF state of LSB

M1

Storing the ON/OFF state of MSB

Control Program:
X0
SUM

K4Y0

D0

BON

K4Y0

M0

K0

BON

K4Y0

M1

K15

Program Description:
z

When X0 = ON, the program will count the active bits (numbers of “1”) among Y0~Y10 and
check the active state (“1”) of the LSB and MSB.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

9-3

9. Data Processing Design Examples

9.3 MEAN/SQR - Mean Value and Square Root
Control Purpose:
z

When X0 = ON, calculate the mean of values in D0~D9 and store the value in D200;
calculate the square root of D200 and save the value in D250.

z

When X1 = ON, calculate the mean of values in D100~D163, store the value in D300;
calculate the square root of D300 and save the value in D350.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Executing MEAN/SQR instruction to calculate 10 continuous data

X1

Executing MEAN/SQR instruction to calculate 64 continuous data

D0~D9

Storing historical data

D200

Storing mean value

D250

Storing square root of the mean value

D100~D163

Storing historical data

D300

Storing mean value

D350

Storing square root of the mean value

Control Program:
X0
MEAN

D0

D200

SQR

D200

D250

MEAN

D100

D300

SQR

D300

D350

K10

X1
K64

Program Description:
z

If the data number falls out of the range between 1~64 in MEAN instruction, or if the SQR
instruction specifies a negative value, PLC will regard it as an “instruction operation error.”

9-4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

9. Data Processing Design Examples

9.4 MEMR/MEMW - File Register Access
D
X
M
Y

File register
memory

C

Data register
memory

T
S

MEMW

MEMR

Write

Read

File register
PLC internal memory

Data register
memory

File register
memory

Data register
memory

Control Purpose:
z

Sending 50 data of No.0~No.49 file registers to D4000~D4049 when PLC is power up.

z

Writing in 100 data of D2000~D2099 into No.0~No.99 file registers when X0 = ON.

z

Reading out 100 data in No.0~No.99 file registers to D3000~D3099 when X1 = ON.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Write data into file registers

X1

Read data in file registers

Control Program:
M1002
SET

M1101

MOV

K0

D1101

MOV

K50

D1102

MOV

K4000

D1103

MEMW

D2000

K0

K100

MEMR

K0

D3000

K100

Read out the data
from No.0~No.49
file registers to
D4000~D4099 by
using special D
and special M when
PLC is power up

X0
X1

DVP-PLC Application Examples

9-5

9. Data Processing Design Examples
Program Description:
z

The memory storing format of PLC internal file registers, Word, is the same as data registers.
However, data in file registers can not be accessed by normal instructions such as MOV.
Therefore, special instructions MEMW/MEMR are needed for accessing file registers.

z

When PLC is power up (no matter RUN or STOP) and M1101 = ON, the program will read
out 50 data from file register No.0~No. 49 to data register D4000~D4049. The initial register
number (K0) is specified by D1101, the amount of registers to be moved (K50) by D1102,
and the initial register number of target registers (D4000) by D1103. Note that the execution
will be done by special M and special D only when PLC is power up.

9-6

DVP-PLC Application Examples

9. Data Processing Design Examples

9.5 ANS/ANR - Level Monitoring Alarm System
Y0

X1

Y1

X0

Control Purpose:
z

Monitoring the water level of an aquaculture farm by alarm and indicator system.
When the level is below the lower bound for 2 minutes, the alarm and the indicator will be

ON. At the same time, the water feeding valve will start working until the level is back to normal
range.
Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Level lower bound sensor

X1

Normal level sensor

Y0

Alarm indicator

Y1

Water feeding valve

Control Program:
M1000
M1049

M1048 will be valid only if M1049 = ON.

X0
ANS
X1
ANRP

T0

K1200

S900

When X0 = ON for more
than 2 minutes, the alarm
S900 will be ON and latched.

When X1 = ON, the alarm will be reset.

M1048
Y0
Y1

When M1048 = ON, the alarm indicator will be ON,
and the water feeding valve will be enabled.

Program Description:
z

When the level is below the lower bound (X0 = ON) for 2 minutes, Y0 and Y1 will be ON.
The alarm indicator will be ON and the water feeding valve will be enabled.

z

When the level reaches normal range (X1 = ON), Y0 and Y1 will be OFF. The alarm will be
reset.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

9-7

9. Data Processing Design Examples

9.6 SORT - Sorting Acquired Data
Control Purpose:
z

Collecting 4 voltage data (Corresponding to frequency of AC motor) by DVP04AD-S analog
module and 4 temperature data by DVP04TC-S thermocouple module.

z

Sorting the 4 channels by voltage in ascending order when M0 = ON and by temperature in
ascending order when M1 = ON.

z

Sorting the data and displaying the sorting result.

Devices:
Device

Function

M0

Sorting voltage data

M1

Sorting temperature data

D200~D203

Numbers of channels to be sorted

D204~D207

Storing 4 voltage data

D208~D211

Storing 4 temperature data

D220~D231

Displaying voltage sorting result

D240~D251

Displaying temperature sorting result

Control Program:
M0
SET

M10

RST

M11

SET

M11

RST

M10

K4

K3

M1

M10 M1013
SORT

D200

D220

K2

D240

K3

Sorting by voltage in ascending order
M11 M1013
SORT

D200

K4

K3

Sorting by temperature in ascending order

9-8

DVP-PLC Application Examples

9. Data Processing Design Examples
Program Description:
z

Acquired data before sorting:
1
Channel (CH1~CH4)

2

3

Voltage (DVP04AD-S) Temp. (DVP04TC-S)

1

(D200)1

(D204)57

(D208)47

2

(D201)2

(D205)59

(D209)42

3

(D202)3

(D206)55

(D210)46

4

(D203)4

(D207)53

(D211)43

1) Sorted voltage data in ascending order when M0 = ON:
1

2

3

Channel (CH1~CH4)

Voltage (DVP04AD-S)

Temp. (DVP04TC-S)

1

(D220)4

(D224)53

(D228)43

2

(D221)3

(D225)55

(D229)46

3

(D222)1

(D226)57

(D230)47

4

(D223)2

(D227)59

(D231)42

The voltage sorting result is: channel 4, channel 3, channel 1, and channel 2. The
minimum value is K53 and the maximum value is K59.
2) Sorted temperature data in ascending order when M1 = ON:
1

2

3

Channel (CH1~CH4)

Voltage (DVP04AD-S)

Temp. (DVP04TC-S)

1

(D240)4

(D244)59

(D248)42

2

(D241)1

(D245)53

(D249)43

3

(D242)2

(D246)55

(D250)46

4

(D243)3

(D247)57

(D251)47

The temperature sorting result is: channel 4, channel 1, channel 2, and channel 3. The
minimum value of is K42 and the maximum value is K47.
z

The purpose of using M1013 (1s clock pulse) after the drive contacts M10 and M11 is to
assure that sorting result can be refreshed in 1s so as to prevent rising edge triggering M10
and M11 when SORT instruction needs to be executed one more time.

z

Users can monitor the sorting result and the minimum/maximum value of voltage and
temperature.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

9-9

9. Data Processing Design Examples
9.7 SER - Room Temperature Monitoring
Control Purpose:
z

Monitoring the overall temperature condition by acquiring temp. data through air condition
system from 20 rooms in the building

Compare the present temp. with the target value. If there are more rooms whose temp. match
the target value, it indicates the air condition system functions well.
z

Adjusting the air condition devices in rooms with the highest and lowest temp.

Count the amount of rooms whose temp. match the target value so as to judge the efficiency of
the air condition system. In addition, search the rooms with the highest and lowest temp for
adjusting immediately.
Devices:
Device
X1

Function
Executing SER instruction to search data

D50~D53

Temperature data acquisition of the 1st thermocouple module (unit: 1°C)

D54~D57

Temperature data acquisition of the 2nd thermocouple module (unit: 1°C)

D58~D61

Temperature data acquisition of the 3rd thermocouple module (unit: 1°C)

D62~D65

Temperature data acquisition of the 4th thermocouple module (unit: 1°C)

D66~D69

Temperature data acquisition of the 5th thermocouple module (unit: 1°C)

D100
D200~D204

Storing the target value
Storing the temperature search result

Control Program:
X1
D100 Initialize the target value as 25℃

MOV

K25

FROM

K0

K6

D0

K4

FROM

K1

K6

D4

K4

FROM

K2

K6

D8

K4

Storing
. the Temp. data acquired from
the 2nd thermocouple module in D4~D7.
Storing the Temp. data acquired from
the 3rd thermocouple module in D8~D11.

FROM

K3

K6

D12

K4

Storing the Temp. data acquired from
the 4th thermocouple module in D12~D15.

FROM

K4

K6

D16

K4

Storing the Temp. data acquired from
the 5th thermocouple module in D16~D19.

X1

9-10

Storing the Temp. data acquired from
the 1st thermocouple module in D0~D3.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

9. Data Processing Design Examples

DIV

D0

K10

D50

DIV

D1

K10

D51

DIV

D2

K10

D52

DIV

D3

K10

D53

Divide the present temp. value
of the first thermocouple module
by 10 so as to change the unit into 1℃.

Data processing for the 2nd
thermocouple module
Data processing for the 3rd
thermocouple module

The omitted data processing of
module 2, 3, 4 is same as module
1 and module 5.

Data processing for the 4th
thermocouple module
DIV

D16

K10

D66

DIV

D17

K10

D67

DIV

D18

K10

D68

DIV

D19

K10

D69

SER

D50

D100

D200

Divide the present temp. value
of the 5th thermocouple module
by 10 so as to change the unit into 1℃.

X1
K20

Counting the amount of rooms whose temperature is 25 ℃
and searching the room number of the highest and lowest temp.

Program Description:
z

Acquired temperature data and search result of 20 rooms:
No.

Compare
result

D50 = K24

0

-

D51 = K25

1

Equal

D52 = K25

2

Equal

Room temp.

Target
value

D53 = K25
D54 = K25
D55 = K22

D100 = K25

D56 = K25

3

Equal

4

Equal

5

Lowest

6

Equal

D57 = K25

7

Equal

D58 = K25

8

Equal

D59 = K25

DVP-PLC Application Examples

9

Equal

Search result

Content

D200 = K16

The amount of rooms with
temp. of 25°C

D201 = K1

The No. of the first room
with temp. of 25°C

D202 = K19

The No. of the last room
with temp. of 25°C

D203 = K5

The No. of the room with
lowest temp.

D204 = K11

The No. of the room with
highest temp.

9-11

9. Data Processing Design Examples

Room temp. Target value No.

Compare
result

D60 = K25

10

Equal

D61 = K27

11

Highest

D62 = K25

12

Equal

D63 = K25

13

Equal

14

-

D65 = K25

15

Equal

D66 = K25

16

Equal

D67 = K25

17

Equal

D68 = K25

18

Equal

D69 = K25

19

Equal

D64 = K26
D100 = K25

9-12

DVP-PLC Application Examples

10. High-speed Input/Output Design Examples

10.1

REF/REFF - DI/DO Refreshment and DI Filter Time Setting

Control Purpose:
Refreshing DI/DO status immediately and setting/displaying DI filter time.
z

When M0 = ON, refresh the status of input points X0~X17 and send the status to D0. When
M1 = ON, transmit the value in D100 to the output points Y0~Y17 and send the output state
to output terminals immediately before END instruction.

z

By controlling the value in D200 according to the interference degree, users can set the filter
time of DI as 0 (actual min. value = 50µs), 10ms, 20ms and 30ms.

Devices:
Device

Function

M0

Starting to refresh the status of input points X0~X17

M1

Starting to refresh the status of output points Y0~Y17

D200

Storing the filter time of the input points

Control Program:
M0

REF

X0

X17

MOV

K4X0

D0

MOV

D100

K4Y0

REF

Y0

Y17

MOV

K10

D200

REFF

K0

M1

M1002

LD<

D200

K10

LD>=

D200

K10

LD<

D200

K20

REFF

K10

LD>=

D200

K20

LD<

D200

K30

REFF

K20

LD>

D200

K30

REFF

K30

DVP-PLC Application Examples

10-1

10. High-speed Input/Output Design Examples
Program Description:
z

Generally the input state (X) is refreshed at the beginning of program scan cycle, and the
output state (Y) is refreshed at the end of END instruction. However, the immediate state
refreshing during the program execution process can be performed by Ref instruction.

z

Due to severe operating environment, PLC DI signal is frequently interfered and error
operations would thus occur. Usually, the interference will not last for a long time. We can
apply a filter to DI signals so that the interference would be decreased in principle.

z

When D200=

C235

K100

K100000
C235

Y4

When proximity
switch X0
detects 100
pulses,Y4 = ON
and the cutter
will start to cut,
then content in
C235 will be
cleared.

Y4
T1

K10

The cutter will perform
cutting action for 1sec
and then be reset..

X2
M1334 When X2 = ON, the pulse output is paused.

Program Description:
z

When START is pressed (X1 = ON), the servo motor will start at the speed of 0.1 r/s (f =
1000Hz) and the speed will be increased by 0.1 r/min every 20ms. After 200ms, the speed
will be 1r/s (f = 10000Hz) and then remain constant. When the set value is nearly reaching,
the servo motor will decelerate and stop rotating when the set value is reached.

z

When PAUSE is pressed (X2 = ON), the servo motor will stop rotating, and the PV in C235
will not be stored. When X2 = OFF, the servo motor will start rotating again and stop when
set value is reached.

z

When the servo motor rotates once, the proximity switch will detect 10 pulses. When the
servo motor rotates 10 times (100 pulses), it will stop rotating and the system will perform
cutting process for 1 sec.

10-12

DVP-PLC Application Examples

11. Floating Point Operation Design Examples

11.1

Elementary Arithmetic for Integer and Floating Point

O
F
F

O
N

X0

Start/Stop

Proximity switch
X1
Product under process

Motor

Control Purpose:
z

When the production line runs, the production control engineer needs to monitor its
real-time speed. The target speed is 1.8 m/s.

z

The motor and the multi-tooth cam rotate with the same axis. There are 10 teeth on the cam,
so the proximity switch will receive 10 pulse signals when the motor rotate once and the
production line will move forward for 0.325m. The equations are as follows:
Motor rotation speed (r/min) = the received pulses in 1 min/10
The speed of the production line = the rotation times of motor in 1s × 0.325 = (Motor rotation
speed/60) × 0.325.

z

Indicator status: Production line speed < 0.8 m/s, the Speed Low indicator will be ON. 0.8
m/s ≤ production line speed ≤ 1.8m/s, the Normal indicator will be on. Production line speed
>1.8m/s, the Speed High indicator will be on.

z

Display the production line speed for production control engineers to monitor.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Pulse frequency detecting switch. X0 = ON when Start is switched on.

X1

Proximity switch. X1 creates a pulse when a tooth on cam is detected.

D0

Storing the detected pulse frequency

D50

Storing the present speed of the production line

DVP-PLC Application Examples

11-1

11. Floating Point Operation Design Examples
Control Program:
X0
SPD

X1

K1000

DDIV

D0

K10

Detecting the number of the pulses
received by the proximity switch in 1s.

D0

M1000
D10
Calculate the production speed
D0
X 0.325
V=
by the equation
and store the result into D50, D51
in binary floating point system.
(Note: all parameters must be binary
floating integers. If not, use FLT
instruction to convert the system.)

DFLT

D10

D12

DEDIV

K315

K1000

D20

DEMUL

D12

D20

D50

DEDIV

K8

K10

D30

Convert the lower speed limit
0.8m/s in binary floating point
system.

DEDIV

K18

K10

D40

Convert the target speed
1.8m/s in binary floating point
system.

DEZCP

D30

D40

D50

M0

Present speed < Lower speed limit (D31, D30), M0=ON.
Lower speed limit(D31, D30) ≤ present speed ≤ Τ arget speed (D41, D40), M1=ON.
Present speed >T arget speed (D41, D40), M2=ON.
DEMUL

D50

K1000

INT

D60

D70

D60

In order to show the result onTP04 screen,
multiply the value in D50with 1000 then
store the integer value in D70. However,
the display value in TP04 will remain the
value before multiplication.

Program Description:
z

Calculate the motor rotation speed (r/min) by using SPD instruction to detect the pulse
frequency (D0) from the proximity switch. Motor rotation speed = the receiving pulses in
1min/10 = (pulse frequency × 60)/10 = (D0×60)/10.

z

The following equation is for obtaining the production line speed through D0:
V:

Production line speed
(unit: m/s)
Motor speed (unit: r/min)
D0: Pulse frequency

N
D0
D0 × 60 10
× 0.325 =
× 0.325 m/s
v=
× 0.325 m/s=
N:
60
10
60

If the detected pulse frequency D0 = K50, the production line speed =

50
× 0.325 m/s
10

=1.625m/s by the above equation
z

The parameter of present production line speed contains decimal points during calculation,
therefore the binary floating point operation instruction is needed for performing the
calculation. .

z

DEZCP instruction is used to compare the present speed with the upper/lower speed limits
and the comparison results will be stored in M0~M2.

11-2

DVP-PLC Application Examples

11. Floating Point Operation Design Examples
z

There are integers and floating points mixed in the operation. If the operational parameters
are not binary floating point values before calculating the production line speed, they have
to be converted by FLT instruction

z

For monitoring easily, the speed value is multiplied with 1000 to obtain the integer in the end
of this program

DVP-PLC Application Examples

11-3

11. Floating Point Operation Design Examples

11.2

Elementary Arithmetic for Floating Point

Control Purpose:
z

Perform the operation (1.236+1.324)×2.5÷10.24 by Delta’s binary floating point operation
instruction.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Initialization switch

X1

Operation control switch

Control Program:
X0
MOVP

K1236

D0

MOVP

K-3

D1

MOVP

K1324

MOVP

K-3

D3

MOVP

K25

D4

MOVP

K-1

D5

MOVP

K1024

D6

MOVP

K-2

D7

DEBIN

D0

D10

DEBIN

D2

D12

DEBIN

D4

D14

DEBIN

D6

D16

DEADD

D10

D12

D100

1.236+1.324

DEMUL

D100

D14

D102

(1.236+1.324)× 2.5

DEDIV

D102

D16

D104

(1.236+1.324)× 2.5÷ 10.24

DEBCD

D104

D106

D2

The values in D1 and D0 are
combined into a decimal floating
-3
point value:1.236=1236X10
The values in D3 and D2 are
combined into a decimal floating
-3
point value:1.324=1324X10
The values in D5 and D4 are
combined into a decimal floating
-1
point value:2.5=25X10
The values in D7 and D6 are
combined into a decimal floating
point value:10.24=1024X10-2

X1

11-4

A decimal floating point value
is converted into a binary
floating point.

A binary floating point value is
converted into a decimal floating point .

DVP-PLC Application Examples

11. Floating Point Operation Design Examples
Program Description:
z

When X0 = ON, sent the values of decimal integers to D0~D7 to form 4 decimal floating
points.

z

When X1 = ON, elementary arithmetic operations for binary floating points will be executed.

z

The binary operational results are not intuitively understandable. Therefore, the binary
floating point value would generally be converted into decimal floating point value. In this
program, the binary values in (D105, D104) are converted into decimal values in (D107,
D106) D106 = K6250, D107 = K-4, so the decimal floating point value 6250×10-4 = 0.625.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

11-5

11. Floating Point Operation Design Examples

MEMO

11-6

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples

Introduction:
The wiring principles of RS-232 / RS-485 communication are keeping the connection as short as
possible and keeping away from high noise source. The RS-232 communication interface is
structured by one to one connections and usually with a shorter connection, so the standard cable or
the cable provided by Delta is compatible for common RS- 232 applications. However, for the
high-speed RS-485 with long distance connection, high communication speed, large number of
stations, high signal attenuation and the possible problems of improper ground potential, mismatched
terminal impedance, noise interference, and wiring methods, the inferior communication quality may
occur if the above factors are not considered properly. Therefore, users should pay attention to the
following notes about the wiring of RS-485 communication:
z

The Limit for the Number of Stations:
The limit for the number of stations connected to DVP-PLC is 254. For RS-485
communication, its hardware interface is compatible with max.16 stations. If more than 16
stations are required, a RS-485 repeater (IFD-8510) should be applied. Each repeater
supports 16 more stations. Users can add stations by adding repeaters till the limit of 254.

z

The Limit for Distance:
In RS-485 communication, it is a function from the data signaling rate to the maximum cable
length for transmission. The value of maximum cable length is generally influenced by the
factors such as signal distortion and noise. The below graph of the function from signaling
rate to cable length is measured by using 24AWG copper twisted pair telephone cable
(diameter: 0.51mm) with the 52.5PF/M bypass capacitor and the 100Ω terminal load (please
refer to GB11014-89 Appendix A). From the figure, suppose the max. acceptable signal loss
is 6dBV, when data signaling rate is lower than 90Kbit/S, the limit for cable length will be
1200m (4Kft.). However, the graph is conservative and a longer cable length is accessible in
practical application. Users can get different cable length by different cable diameters. For
example, if the data signaling rate is 600Kbit/S and the cable is 24AWG, the maximum cable
length will be 200m. If the cable is 19AWG (diameter: 0.91mm), the maximum cable length
could be longer than 200m. If the cable is 28AWG (diameter: 0.32mm), the maximum cable
length can only be shorter than 200m.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-1

12. Communication Design Examples
The relation between the transmission speed (bps) and the transmission distance (foot) for
RS-485 standard communication interface:
Transmission
distance (feet)

Transmission
speed (bps)

z

The Limit for Cables :
Users should choose shielded twisted pair cables for wiring because the quality of cables
will greatly influence the transmission signal. If users use low quality cables (such as PVC
twisted pair cables), the signal attenuation will be higher and the transmission distance will
be significantly shortened. In addition, the communication could be interfered easily due to
the poor noise immunity of low quality cables. Therefore, in situations of high transmission
speed, long distance or high noise, the high quality twisted pair cable (such as Polyethylene
twisted pair cable) should be used. However, in situations of low transmission speed and low
noise, PVC twisted pair cable will be a compatible and cost saving choice though the signal
loss of PVC cable could be 1,000 times bigger than high quality cable. If the transmission
distance is too long to increase the signal attenuation, users can use RS-485 repeater
(IFD-8510) to magnify the signal.

z

Wiring Topology:
For RS-485 wiring, the nodes should be near the master cable as much as possible.
Generally, daisy chain topology structure is recommended for RS-485 wiring. Topology is
the link structure of the connection. The topology of RS-485 must be station-by-station
structure, that is, stations should be connected from 1 to 2, 2 to 3, etc. Star and ring
topological structures are not permitted.

z

Signal Grounding (SG):
Though the RS-485 network can be connected by twisted cables only, it is easily to be
interfered by noise and should be connected under the condition that the CMV (Common
Mode Voltage) between stations should not exceed the max. allowable CMV of RS-485
transmission IC. If the CMV exceeds the working voltage range of IC, RS-485 will stop
working.

12-2

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
However, no matter what degree the CMV is, we suggest users connect each SG of stations
(please refer to “Wiring Topology”) by using shielded twisted pair cables so as to reduce the
CMV. This wiring method provides the shortest circuit for communication and improves the
noise immunity as well.
z

Terminal Resistor:
All cables have their own characteristic impedance (120Ω for Twisted Pair). When the signal
is transferred to the terminal and the terminal impedance is different from the characteristic
impedance, echo signal will occur to distort the waveform (convex or concave). This
situation is not obvious for short cables but become serious when the cable length increases.
In this case, a terminal resistor needs to be applied for maintaining the normal
communication.

z

Methods to Reduce the Noise:
When RS-485 network is connected according to the above rules and applied with a 120Ω
terminator also, most of the noise interference can be reduced. If the interference continues,
that means there is a strong noise source near the network. In addition to keeping the cable
away from the strong noise source (such as electromagnetic valve, AC motor drive, AC
servo drive, or other power equipment and their power lines), the best way to reduce the
noise is to add a noise suppressor to the noise source. The figure below is the noise
suppressing methods for AC motor drive, AC servo drive, and other power equipment. (To
apply X capacitors, Y capacitors, or X+Y capacitors) C = 0.22μf~0.47μf/AC630V.

Generally, the RS-485 communication cable is made of twisted pair and transmits the signal
by the potential difference between the twisted pair, and therefore it is called differential
mode transmission. Differential mode interference is transferred between 2 cables and
belongs to symmetric interference, which can be reduced by applying a stabilizing resistor to
the circuit together with twisted pair cables. On the other hand, common mode interference
is transferred between the communication cable and the earth, which belongs to asymmetric
interference. Common mode interference can be eliminated by the following methods:
1.

Use shielded twisted-pair cables and ensure it is well-grounded.

2.

Use galvanized pipes to shelter the strong electric field.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-3

12. Communication Design Examples
3.

Keep away from the high voltage line when wiring. Do not bond the high voltage
power lines and the signal lines together.

4.

Use linear stabilizer circuit or high quality switching power supply (ripples <
50mV).

12-4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples

12.1

Communication between PLC and Delta VFD-M Series AC Motor Drive
(MODRD/MODWR)

Control Purpose:
z

Repeatedly reading the master frequency and output frequency of VFD-M series AC motor
drive then store them in D0 and D1 by MODRD instruction.

z

Repeatedly setting the running direction and running frequency by MODWR instruction. For
example, setting the AC motor drive to run forward in 40Hz.

Parameter Settings for VFD-M Series AC Motor Drive:
Parameter

Set value

Explanation

P00

03

Master frequency determined by RS485 com port.

P01

03

Operation determined by RS-485 com port, keypad STOP is
effective.

P88

01

Communication address: 01

P89

01

Communication rate: 9600

P92

01

MODBUS ASCII mode, <7,E,1>

Ú If AC motor drive can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set P76 = 10
(factory defaults) and then set the parameters according to the above table.
Devices:
Device

Function

M0

Executing MODRD instruction to read master and output frequency.

M1

Executing the first MODWR instruction to set the running direction

M2

Executing the second MODWR instruction to set the running frequency

D10

Set value of the drive running direction.

D11

Set value of the drive running frequency.

Control Program:
M1002
MOV

H86

SET

M1120

MOV

K100

RST

M1143

D1120

Set communication
format: 9600, 7, E,1l

Retain communication setting
D1129

Set receiving time-out
: 100ms

Select communication mode:
MODBUS ASCII

LD=

C0

K0

M0

Execute MODRD instruction

LD=

C0

K1

M1

Execute the first MODWR instruction

LD=

C0

K2

M2

Execute the second MODWR instruction

LD=

C0

K3

RST

DVP-PLC Application Examples

C0

12-5

12. Communication Design Examples
M0
SET

M1122

MODRD

K1

Sending request

M1

M2

M0

M1

K2

Read master frequency and output frequency of A C
motor drive and store them in D1050 and D1051
MODWR

M2

H2102

K1

H2000

D10

Set the AC motor drive to run forward. D10=H12
MODWR

K1

H2001

D11

Set the master frequency of the drive: 40Hz. D11=K4000
M1127
CNT

C0

RST

M1127

CNT

C0

RST

M1129

CNT

C0

RST

M 1140

CNT

C0

RST

M1141

MOV

D1050

K10

Reset the flag M1127

M1129

M1140

M1141

C0 counts once
when data receiving
is completed.

K10

C0 counts once
when communication
timeout occurs.

Reset the flag M1129
C0 counts once
when data receiving
error occurs.
.
Reset the flag M1140.
K10

C0 counts once
when parameter error
occurs.
.
Reset the flag M1141
K10

M1000
D0

Send the master frequency of the drive to D0
MOV

D1051

D1

Send the output frequency of the drive to D1

Program Description:
z
12-6

Initialize PLC RS-485 communication port and set the communication format as MODBUS
DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
ASCII, 9600, 7, E, 1. The RS-485 communication format of AC motor drive should be the
same with PLC.
z

There are only 4 situations for MODBUS communication: flag M1127 for normal
communication and M1129, M1140, M1141 for communication errors. Counter C0 counts
once when any of the 4 flags is ON. Therefore, the program assures the communication
reliability by monitoring the On/Off status of the 4 flags and performs 3 MODBUS
instructions in order by the value in counter C0.

z

When M0 = ON, [MODRD K1 H2102 K2] instruction will be executed. PLC will read the
master frequency and output frequency of AC motor drive, store them in D1073~1076 in
ASCII format, and automatically convert the content in D1073~1076 into hexadecimal
values to D1050 and D1051.

z

When M1 = ON, [MODWR K1 H2000 D10] instruction will be executed. D10 = H12 and the
drive will run forward. The running direction can be changed by the content in D10.

z

When M2 = ON, [MODWR K1 H2001 D11] instruction will be executed. D11 = K4000 and
the drive running frequency will be 40Hz. The frequency can be changed by the content in
D11.

z

On the bottom of this program, [MOV D1050 D0] instruction stores the master frequency of
the drive in D0, and [MOV D1051 D1] instruction stores the output frequency of the drive in
D1.

z

Once PLC starts running, the read/write actions for AC motor drive will be performed
repeatedly according to [LD=] instructions.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-7

12. Communication Design Examples

12.2

Communication between PLC and Delta VFD-B Series AC Motor Drive
(MODRD/MODWR)

Control Purpose:
z

Repeatedly reading the master frequency and output frequency of VFD-B series AC motor
drive by MODRD instruction.

z

Start AC motor drive in reverse direction when Start is pressed. Increase 1Hz per second
until it reaches 50Hz. Maintain the frequency at 50Hz. (MODWR instruction)

z

Stop AC motor drive by when Stop is pressed. (MODWR instruction)

Parameter Settings for VFD-B Series AC Motor Drive:
Parameter

Set value

Explanation

02-00

04

RS-485 serial communication. Last used frequency saved.

02-01

03

RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.

09-00

01

Communication address: 01

09-01

02

Communication baud rate: 19200.

09-04

03

MODBUS RTU mode, protocol <8,N,2>

Ú If AC motor drive can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set P00-02 =
10 (factory defaults) and then set the parameters according to the above table.
Devices:
Device
X0
X1

Function
Start button for the drive
Stop button for the drive

M0

Executing MODRD instruction to read master and output frequency

M1

Executing the first MODWR instruction to set the running direction

M2

Executing the second MODWR instruction to set the running frequency

Control Program:
M1002

12-8

MOV

H99

SET

M1120

MOV

K100

SET

M1143

D1120

Set communication
format: 19200, 8, N, 2

Retain communication setting
D1129

Set receiving time-out:
100ms

Select communication mode:
MODBUS RTU

RST

D2

Reset D2 first when PLC runs

RST

D10

Reset D10 first when PLC runs

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
X0( S tarting AC motor drive)
MOV

H22

SET

M10

MOV

H1

RST

M10

RST

D2

ADD

D2

D10

Set M10 to increase frequency

X1( S topping AC motor drive)

M1013 M11

Set the AC motor drive
to run in reverse when
D10 = H22

D10

Stop A C motor drive
when D10 = H1

Reset M10 to stop frequency
increasing
Reset D2

M10
K100

D2

Increase the content in D2 with 100
per second (1Hz/sec) until it reaches
50Hz. Maintain the frequency at 50Hz.

LD>=

D2

K5000

M11

LD=

C0

K0

M0

Execute MODRD instruction

LD=

C0

K1

M1

Execute the first MODWR instruction

LD=

C0

K2

M2

Execute the second MODWR instruction

LD=

C0

K3

RST

C0

SET

M1122

MODRD

K1

M0
Sending request

M1
M2

M0
H2102

K2

Read master frequency and output frequency of AC
motor drive and store them in D1073~D1076.
M1
MODWR
M2

D10

K1

H2001

D2

Set the master frequency according to the content
in D2
C0 counts once
K10
CNT
C0
when data receiving
is completed.
RST

DVP-PLC Application Examples

H2000

Set the AC motor drive to run in reverse or stop
according to the content in D10
MODWR

M1127

K1

M1127

Reset flag M1127.

12-9

12. Communication Design Examples
M1129
CNT

C0

RST

M1129

CNT

C0

RST

M1140

CNT

C0

RST

M1141

K10

C0 counts once
when communication
timeout occurs.

Reset the flag M1129

M1140
K10

C0 counts once
when data receiving
error occurs.

Reset the flag M1140

M1141
K10

C0 counts once
when parameter err or
occurs.

Reset the flag M1141

Program Description:
z

Initialize PLC RS-485 communication port and set the communication format as MODBUS
RTU, 19200, 8, N, 2. The RS-485 communication format of AC motor drive should be the
same with PLC.

z

There are only 4 situations for MODBUS communication: flag M1127 for normal
communication and M1129, M1140, M1141 for communication errors. Counter C0 counts
once when any of the 4 flags is ON. Therefore, the program assures the communication
reliability by monitoring the On/Off status of the 4 flags and performs 3 MODBUS
instructions in order by the value in counter C0.

z

When M0 = ON, [MODRD K1 H2102 K2] instruction will be executed. PLC will read the
master frequency and output frequency of AC motor drive, store them in D1073~1076 in
ASCII format, and automatically convert the content in D1073~1076 into hexadecimal
values to D1050 and D1051.

z

When M1 = ON, [MODWR K1 H2000 D10] instruction will be executed. D10 = H22 and the
drive will run in reverse. If D10 = H1, the drive will be stopped.

z

When M2 = ON, [MODWR K1 H2001 D2] instruction will be executed. The frequency can be
changed by the content in D2.

z

Once PLC starts running, the read/write actions for AC motor drive will be performed
repeatedly according to [LD=] instructions.

12-10

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples

12.3

Communication between PLC and Delta VFD-V Series AC Motor Drive
(MODRD/MODWR)

Control Purpose:
z

Repeatedly reading the master frequency and output frequency of VFD-V series AC motor
drive by MODRD instruction.

z

Setting the drive to run forward in 30Hz by MODRW instruction when X0 is pressed.

z

Setting the drive to run in reverse in 20Hz by MODRW instruction when X1 is pressed.

z

Stopping the drive by MODWR instruction when X2 is pressed.

Parameter Settings for VFD-V Series AC Motor Drive:
Parameter

Set value

Explanation

00-20

1

Master frequency controlled by RS-485 communication.

00-21

0

Digital keypad (KPV-CE01)

09-00

01

Communication address: 01

09-01

9.6

Communication baud rate: 9600.

09-04

02

ASCII mode. Protocol: (7, E, 1).

Ú If AC motor drive can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set P00-02 =
10 (factory defaults) and then set the parameters according to the above table.
Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Forward

X1

Reverse

X2

Stop

M0

Executing MODRD instruction to read master and output frequency

M1

Executing MODWR instruction to set running direction and frequency

Control Program:
M1002

DVP-PLC Application Examples

MOV

H86

SET

M1120

MOV

K200

RST

M1143

ZRS T

D0

D1120

Set communication
format: 9600, 7, E , 1

Retain communication setting
D1129

Set receiving time-out:
200ms

Select communication mode:
MODBUS ASCII
D1

Reset D0 and D1 first
when PLC runs.

12-11

12. Communication Design Examples
X0
MOV

H12

D0

MOV

K3000

D1

MOV

K22

D0

MOV

K2000

D1

MOV

H1

D0

Run forward in 30Hz
when X0 = ON

X1
Run in reverse in 20Hz
when X1 = ON

X2
Stop when X2 = ON
RST

D1

LD=

C0

K0

M0

Execute MODRD instruction

LD=

C0

K1

M1

Execute MODRW instruction

LD=

C0

K2

RST

C0

SET

M1122

MODRD

K1

M0
Sending request

M1
M0
H2102

Read master frequency and output frequency of AC
motor drive and store them in D1050 and D1051.

M1
MODRW

K1

K16

H2000

D0

K2

Set START/ST OP state and master frequency of AC motor drive
C0 counts once
when data receiving
CNT
C0
K10
is completed

M1127

Reset the flag M1127

RST

M1127

MOV

D1050

D2

Store the master frequency
of AC motor drive in D2

MOV

D1051

D3

Store the master frequency
of AC motor drive in D3

CNT

C0

K10

RST

M1129

M0

M1129

12-12

K2

C0 counts once
when communication
timeout occurs.

Reset the flag M1129

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
M1140
CNT

C0

RST

M1140

CNT

C0

RST

M1141

K10

C0 counts once
when data receiving
error occurs.

Reset the flag M1140

M1141
K10

C0 counts once
when parameter error
occurs.

Reset the flag M1141

Program Description:
z

Initialize PLC RS-485 communication port and set the communication format as MODBUS
RTU, 19200, 8, N, 2. The RS-485 communication format of AC motor drive should be the
same with PLC.

z

Reset D0 and D1 when PLC is powered up so as to ensure the drive is in the Stop status

z

When X0 is activated, the drive will run forward (D0 = H12) in 30Hz (D1 = 3000).

z

When X1 is activated, the drive will run in reverse (D0 = H22) in 20Hz (D1 = K2000)

z

When X2 is activated, the drive will stop. (D0 = H1, D1 = 0)

z

There are only 4 situations for MODBUS communication: flag M1127 for normal
communication and M1129, M1140, M1141 for communication errors. Counter C0 counts
once when any of the 4 flags is ON. Therefore, the program assures the communication
reliability by monitoring the On/Off status of the 4 flags and performs 2 MODBUS
instructions in order by the value in counter C0.

z

The master frequency and output frequency stored in D1050 and D1051 will be sent to D2
and D3.

z

Once PLC starts running, the read/write actions for AC motor drive will be performed
repeatedly according to [LD=] instructions.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-13

12. Communication Design Examples

12.4

Communication between PLC and Delta ASD-A Series AC Servo Drive (Positioning,
MODRD/MODWR)
AC Servo drive control panel
Power Start Positioning
norm al normal completed
Servo ON
SON

Positioning enabled
CTRG

Wiring for Delta ASD-A Series AC Servo Drive:

L1

U
V

L2

W

R

CN1

S

3 phases AC power

T
CN1

SON

24V

VDD 17
COM+ 11
DI1

CTRG

7 DO1+
6 DO15 DO2+
4 DO23 DO3+

4.7K

9

24V
Power normal
24V
Start normal
24V
Positioning completed

2 DO3-

4.7K

DI2 10
COM- 45

CN2

Encoder

Error counter
Electric gear

Control Purpose:
z

Reading the target position of AC servo drive (incremental position) by MODRD instruction.

z

Setting the target position of AC servo drive (incremental position) by MODRW instruction.

z

Enabling the starting and positioning actions of AC servo drive by the input points DI1~ DI2
when corresponding buttons are pressed.

z

Showing the status of AC servo drive through indicators by the output points DO1~DO3

Parameter Settings for ASD-A Series AC Servo Drive:

12-14

Parameter

Set value

Explanation

P1-01

1

Control Mode and Output Direction

P1-33

1

Position Control Mode (Pr)

P2-10

101

Digital Input Terminal 1 (DI1)

P2-11

108

Digital Input Terminal 2 (DI2)

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
P2-15

0

Digital Input Terminal 6 (DI6)

P2-16

0

Digital Input Terminal 7 (DI7)

P2-17

0

Digital Input Terminal 8 (DI8)

P2-18

101

Digital Output Terminal 1 (DO1)

P2-19

102

Digital Output Terminal 2 (DO2)

P2-20

105

Digital Output Terminal 3 (DO3)

P3-00

1

Communication Address Setting

P3-01

1

Transmission Speed, Baud rate: 9600

P3-02

1

MODBUS ASCII mode. Data format: (7, E, 1)

P3-03

1

Warning and stopping if communication error occurred.

P3-05

2

RS-485 communication format

P3-06

0

Digital Input Communication Function

Ú If AC servo drive can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set P2-08 = 10
(factory defaults) and then set the parameters according to the above table.
z

Operation Steps:
Power normal

DO1

Start normal
DO2
DO3

Positioning end
Positioning end
Positioning
start
Positioning start
Positioning commpleted
10.5 circles

9 circles
Servo ON

DI1
DI2 CTRG
The first time

1.

The second time

Positioning e nabled

Set the parameters of AC servo drive then power up again. If no error occurred, “power
normal” indicator (DO1) will be ON.

2.

When Power normal indicator is ON, turn on SON (servo ON) to enable DI1. If no error
occurred, “Start normal” indicator (DO2) will be ON.

3.

When “Start normal” indicator in ON, turn on CTRG (positioning enabled) to trigger DI2.
The servo motor will rotate for 10.5 cycles and then the “positioning completed” indicator
(DO3) will be ON.

Devices:
Device
M0
M1

DVP-PLC Application Examples

Function
Executing MODRD instruction to read rotation number and pulse number of
internal position 1
Executing MODRW instruction to set rotation number and pulse number of
internal position 1

12-15

12. Communication Design Examples
Control Program:
M1002
D1120

Set communication
format: 9600, 7, E, 1

MOV

H86

SET

M1120

MOV

K500

D1129

Set receiving time-out:
500ms

MOV

K10

D10

Set rotation number of
internal position 1.

MOV

K5000

D11

Set pulse number of
internal position 1.

Retain communication setting

M1002

LD=

C0

K0

M0

Execute MODRD instruction

LD=

C0

K1

M1

Execute MODRW instruction

LD=

C0

K2

RST

C0

SET

M1122

MODRD

K1

M0
Sending request

M1

M0
H10F

K2

Read the rotation number and pulse number of
internal position 1 then store them in D1050 and D1051
M1
MODRW
M1127

K1

K16

H10F

D10

K2

Write the content in D10 and D11 into H10F and H110 of AC servo drive
C0 counts each time when
K10
CNT
C0
communication is completed.

M1129
RST

M1127

Reset the flag M1127

RST

M1129

Reset the flag M1129

RST

M1140

Reset the flag M1140

RST

M1141

Reset the flag M1141

M1140
M1141

12-16

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
Program Description:
z

Initialize PLC RS-485 communication port and set the communication format as MODBUS
ASCII, 9600, 7, E, 1. The RS-485 communication format of AC servo drive should be the
same with PLC.

z

When M0 = ON, [MODRD K1 H10F K2] instruction will be executed to read the rotation
number and the pulse number of internal position 1 and store them in D1050 and D1051.

z

When M1 = ON, [MODWR K1 K16 H10F D10 K2] instruction will be executed to write the
content in D10 and D11 into H10F (Rotation number of internal position1) and H10 (pulse
number of internal position 1).

z

Both the start signal and the trigger signal are controlled by switches of AC servo drive
through the external wiring. For the wiring methods, please refer to the wiring diagram.

z

There are only 4 situations for MODBUS communication: flag M1127 for normal
communication and M1129, M1140, M1141 for communication errors. Counter C0 counts
once when any of the 4 flags is ON. Therefore, the program assures the communication
reliability by monitoring the On/Off status of the 4 flags and performs 2 MODBUS
instructions in order by the value in counter C0.

z

Once PLC starts running, the read/write actions for AC servo drive will be performed
repeatedly according to [LD=] instructions.

.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-17

12. Communication Design Examples

12.5

Communication between PLC and Delta ASD-A Series AC Servo Drive (Speed
Control, MODRD/MODRW)
AC servo drive control panel
Power normal Start normal Speed reached
Servo ON Speed switching
SON

SPD0

SPD1

Wiring for Delta ASD-A Series AC Servo Drive:
L1 Delta AC servo drive
L2
ASDA series

U
V

R

W

S

3 phases AC power

T
CN1

SON
SPD1

DI1

CN1
7 DO1+
6 DO15 DO2+
4 DO2-

24V

VDD 17
COM+ 11
SPD0

Servo motor

9

DI3 34
D14 8

4.7K

24V
Power normal
24V
Start normal

4.7K
4.7K

COM- 45

CN2

Encoder

Error counter
Electric gear

Control Purpose:
z

Reading rotation speed of servo motor and storing it in D0 by MODRD instruction.

z

Controlling the motor to rotate in 2 fixed speeds or specified speed by MODRW instruction
together with switches SPD0 and SPD1.

z

12-18

Definitions of the speed switches of AC servo drive:
SPD0
Status

SPD1
Status

Function

ON

OFF

SPD0 ON: selecting the first speed set in P1-09 (determined by the
content in D9, fixed as K1500 in this program. The rotation speed of
the motor: 1500 r/min. Direction: forward.)

OFF

ON

SPD1 ON: selecting the second speed set in P1-10 (determined by
the content in D10, fixed as K-1500 in this program. The rotation
speed of the motor: 1500 r/min. Direction: reverse.)

ON

ON

SPD0 and SPD1 ON: selecting the third speed set in P1-11
(determined by the content in D11. The rotation speed of the motor is
specified by user with the content in D11.
DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
Showing the status of AC servo drive through indicators by the output points DO1~DO3.

z

Parameter Settings for ASDA Series AC Servo Drive:
Parameter

Set value

Explanation

P1-01

2

P1-39

1500

Target Motor Speed: 1500rpm.

P2-10

101

Digital Input Terminal 1 (DI1)

P2-12

114

DI3: the input terminal of SPD0

P2-13

115

DI4: the input terminal of SPD1

P2-15

0

No function

P2-16

0

No function

P2-17

0

No function

P2-18

101

DO1 = ON if no error occurred after power up

P2-19

102

DO2 = ON if no error occurred after servo started

P2-20

104

DO3 = ON when target speed reached

P3-00

1

Communication Address Setting

P3-01

1

Transmission Speed, Baud rate: 9600

P3-02

1

MODBUS ASCII mode. Data format: (7, E, 1)

P3-05

2

RS-485 communication format

P3-06

0

Digital Input Communication Function

Control Mode and Output Direction

Ú If AC servo drive can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set P2-08 = 10
(factory defaults) and then set the parameters according to the above table.
z

Operation Steps:
Po we r n orma l

D O1

Sta rt n o rma l

D O2
D I1

1.

SON

Servo O N

Set the parameters of AC servo drive then power up again. If no error occurred, “power
normal” indicator (DO1) will be ON.

2.

When Power normal indicator is ON, turn on SON (servo ON) to enable DI1. If no error
occurred, “Start normal” indicator (DO2) will be ON.

3.

Turn on “SPD0”, the speed set in parameter P1-09 will be enabled. Turn on “SPD1”, and
the speed set in parameter P1-10 will be enabled. Turn on both “SPD0” and “SPD1”, the
speed set in parameter P1-11 will be enabled.

Devices:
Device

Function

M0

Executing MODRD instruction to read the rotation speed of motor

M1

Execute MODWR instruction

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-19

12. Communication Design Examples
Control Program:
M1002

S0
S

D1120

Set communication
format: 9600, 7, E, 1

M OV

H86

SET

M 1120

M OV

K500

RST

M 1143

SET

S0

Enter step S0

SET

M1122

Sending request

MODRD

K1

Retain communication setting
D1129

Set receiving time-out:
500ms

Set communication mode:
MODBUS ASCII

M0
M0

M1127

H4

K1

Read the rotation speed of servo motor and store it in D1050
Send the content
D1050
D0
MOV
in D1050 to D0
RST

M 1127

SET

S20

RST

M1129

Reset M1129

RST

M1140

Reset M1140

RST

M1141

Reset M1141

SET

S20

Reset M1127.
Enter step S20

M1129
M1140
M1141

S20
S

Enter step S20

M1

MOV

K1500

D9

Set the first speed to 1500 r/min
in forwar d direction
MOV

K-1500

D10

Set the second speed to 1500 r/min
in reverse direction

12-20

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples

MOV

M1

K1000

D11

Set the third speed to 1000r/min
in forward direction
SET
M ODRW

M1122
K1

Sending request
K16

H109

D9

K3

Write the content in D9, D10, D11 into H109 of AC servo drive
M1127
RST

M1127

Reset M1127.

RST

M1129

Reset M1129.

RST

M1140

Reset M1140.

RST

M1141

Reset M1441.

M1129
M1140
M1141

S0

Return to step S 0

RET

Program Description:
z

Initialize PLC RS-485 communication port and set the communication format as MODBUS
ASCII, 9600, 7, E, 1. The RS-485 communication format of AC servo drive should be the
same with PLC.

z

When enter into step point S0, M0 = ON, [MODRD K1 H4 K1] instruction will be executed to
read the motor rotation speed and store it in D1050. Then [MOV D1050 D0] instruction will
be executed for showing the rotation speed in D0.

z

When enter into step S20, M1 = ON, [MODWR K1 K16 H109 D9 K3] instruction will be
executed to write the content in D9, D10 and D11 into the H109, H10A and H10B as the
parameters of communication address.

z

The initial setting in D11 is K1000. Users can specify the value by actual application.

z

When PLC starts, the program will enter step S0 then move to step S20 and return to S0.
The read/write actions for AC servo drive will be performed repeatedly by this process.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-21

12. Communication Design Examples

12.6

Communication between PLC and Delta DTA Series Temperature Controller
(MODRD/MODWR)

Control Purpose:
Reading the target value and the set value of the temperature controller (TC). (address:

z

H4700, MODRD instruction)
z

Setting the target temperature as 24° (address H4701, MODWR instruction)

z

Setting the heating/cooling control cycle. (address: H4712, MODWR instruction)

z

Setting the control mode as cooling. (address: H4718, MODWR instruction)

Parameter Settings for DTA Series Temperature Controller:
Parameter

Function

Set value

C WE: Write-in function disable/enable

ON

C-SL: ASCII, RTU communication format selection

ASCII

C NO: Communication address setting

1

BPS: Communication baud rate setting

9600

LENGTH: Data length setting

7

PARITY: Parity bit setting

E

STOP BIT: Stop bit setting

1

UNIT: Temperature display unit °C or ℉

°C

Ú If TC can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set the TC to factory
defaults first and then set the parameters according to the above table.
Steps of setting factory defaults:
1.

in the main screen to enter

Press

page. Use

to select

. Press

to save the setting.
2.

Press both

and

for about 1s to enter default setting mode. (Other operation is

prohibited in this mode, or setting error will occur, and the TC have to be sent back to
factory for adjusting)
page, press

to set

as

. Press

to save the setting.

3.

In

4.

Turn off TC then power up again.

5.

The communication protocols of DTA series TC are as follows:
z

Supporting MODBUS ASCII/RTU. Baud rate: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400.

z

Supporting function codes: 03H (read multiple words). 06H (write 1 word).
Non-supporting function code: 10H (write multiple words).

12-22

z

Non-supporting formats in ASCII mode: 7, N, 1 or 8, O, 2 or 8, E, 2.

z

Supporting formats in RTU mode: 8, N, 1 or 8, N, 2 or 8, O, 1 or 8, E, 1.

z

Available communication address: 1 to 255, 0 is broadcast address.
DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
Devices:
Devices

Function

M0

Execute MODRD instruction to read target and current temperature.

M1

Execute the first MODWR instruction to set target temperature of TC.

M2

Execute the 2nd MODWR instruction to set the heating/cooling cycle time.

M3

Execute the 3rd MODWR instruction to set the control mode as Cooling.

Control Program:
M1002
D1120

Set communication
format: 9600, 7, E, 1

MOV

H86

SET

M1120

MOV

K500

D1129

RST

M1143

Select communication mode:
MODBUS ASCII

Retain communication setting
Set receiving time-out:
500ms

LD=

C0

K0

M0

Execute MODRD instruction

LD=

C0

K1

M1

Execute the 1st MODWR instruction

LD=

C0

K2

M2

Execute the 2nd MODWR instruction

LD=

C0

K3

M3

Execute the 3rd MODWR instruction

LD=

C0

K4

RST

C0

SET

M1122

MODRD

K1

M0
Sending request

M1
M2
M3
M0

M1

H4700

K2

Read the target value and the present value of the
TC and store them in D1050 and D1051
MODWR

K1

H4701

K240

Set the TC target value as 24℃

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-23

12. Communication Design Examples
M2
K1

MODWR

H4712

K20

Set the heating/cooling cycle time: 20s
M3
MODWR
M1127

K1

H4718

K1

Set temperature control mode: cooling mode
CNT

C0

RST

M1127

CNT

C0

RST

M1129

CNT

C0

RST

M1140

CNT

C0

RST

M1141

K10

C0 counts once
when data receiving
is completed.

Reset M1127

M1129
K10

C0 counts once
when communication
timeout occurs

Reset M1129

M1140
K10

C0 counts once
when data receiving
error occurs

Reset M1140

M1141
K10

C0 counts once
when parameter
error occurs

Reset M1141

Program Description:
z

Initialize PLC RS-485 communication port and set the communication format as MODBUS
ASCII, 9600, 7, E, 1. The RS-485 communication format of TC should be the same with
PLC.

z

Since DTA series TC does not support the function code 10H (Write multiple words), the
program needs 3 MODWR instructions to write 3 address data.

z

There are only 4 situations for MODBUS communication: flag M1127 for normal
communication and M1129, M1140, M1141 for communication errors. Counter C0 counts
once when any of the 4 flags is ON. Therefore, the program assures the communication
reliability by monitoring the On/Off status of the 4 flags and performs 4 MODBUS
instructions in order by the value in counter C0

z

Once PLC starts running, the read/write actions for TC will be performed repeatedly
according to [LD=] instructions.

12-24

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples

12.7

Communication between PLC and Delta DTB Series Temperature Controller
(MODRD/MODWR/MODRW)

Control Purpose:
z

Reading as well as displaying the target value and the present value of the TC by MODRD
instruction.

z

Setting the parameters of the TC as following data by MODWR and MODRW instructions.
Parameter

value

Communication address

26°C

1001H

50°C

1002H

0°C

1003H

The first alarm type

1020H

Upper-limit alarm 1

5°C

1024H

Lower-limit alarm 1

3°C

1025H

Target temperature
Upper limit of temperature range
Lower limit of temperature range
Output type of alarm 1

Parameter Settings for DTB Series Temperature Controller:
Parameter

Function

Set value

C WE: Write-in function disable/enable

ON

C-SL: ASCII, RTU communication format selection

RTU

C NO: Communication address setting

1

BPS: Communication baud rate setting

9600

LENGTH: Data length setting

8

PARITY: Parity bit setting

N

STOP BIT: Stop bit setting

2

UNIT: Temperature display unit °C or ℉

°C

Ú If TC can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set the TC to factory
defaults first and then set the parameters according to the above table. The setting steps of
DTB series are the same with DTA series TC.
Ú Communication protocol of DTB series is as following:
1.

Supporting MODBUS ASCII/RTU communication protocol. Communication baud rate:
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400.

2.

Supporting function code: 03H to read the contents of register. 06H to write 1 word into
register. 10H to write many words into register.

3.

Non-supported formats in ASCII mode: 7, N, 1 or 8, O, 2 or 8, E, 2

4.

Formats in RTU mode: 8, N, 1 or 8, N, 2 or 8, O, 1 or 8, E, 1.

5.

Available communication address: 1 to 255, 0 is broadcast address.

Devices:
Device

DVP-PLC Application Examples

Function

12-25

12. Communication Design Examples

Device

Function

M0

Executing MODRD instruction to read target and present temperature

M1

Executing the 1st MODWR instruction to set target temperature of TC

M2

Executing the 2nd MODWR instruction to set alarm output type
Executing the 1st MODRW instruction to set the upper/lower limit of
temperature range
Executing the 2nd MODRW instruction to set the upper/lower limit of alarm 1

M3
M4

Control Program:
M1002
D1120

Set up communication
format: 9600,8,N,2

MOV

H89

SET

M1120

MOV

K100

SET

M1143

MOV

K500

D0

Upper limit of temp.
Range:50℃

MOV

K0

D1

Lower limit of temp.
Range:0℃

MOV

K50

D2

Upper-limit of the
alarm: 5℃

MOV

K30

D3

Lower-limit of the
alarm:3℃

Retain communication setting
D1129

Set receiving time-out:
100ms

Select communication mode:
MODBUS RTU

LD=

C0

K0

M0

Execute MODRD instruction

LD=

C0

K1

M1

Execute the 1st MODWR instruction

LD=

C0

K2

M2

Execute the 2nd MODWR instruction

LD=

C0

K3

M3

Execute the 1st MODRW instruction

LD=

C0

K4

M4

Execute the 2nd MODRW instruction

LD=

C0

K5

RST

C0

SET

M1122

M0
Sending request

M1
M2
M3
M4

12-26

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples

M0
MODRD
M1

H1001

K260

K1

H1020

K1

K1

K16

H1002

D0

K2

Set upper/lower limit of temperature range
MODRW

M1127

K1

Set output mode of alarm 1 as the 1st alarm type
MODRW

M4

K2

Set target value as 26℃
MODWR

M3

H1000

Read the target value and the present value of the
TC and store them in D1073~D1076
MODWR

M2

K1

K1

K16

H1024

D2

K2

Set the upper/lower limit of alarm 1
C0 counts once
when data receiving
CNT
C0
K10
is completed.
RST

M1127

CNT

C0

RST

M1129

CNT

C0

RST

M1140

CNT

C0

RST

M1141

Reset M1127

M1129
K10

C0 counts once
when communication
timeout occurs.

Reset M1129

M1140
K10

C0 counts once
when data receiving
errors occurs.

Reset M1140

M1141
K10

C0 counts once
when parameter error
occurs.

Program Description:
z

Initialize PLC RS-485 communication port and set the communication format as MODBUS
RTU, 9800, 8, N, 2. The RS-485 communication format of TC should be the same with PLC..

z

There are only 4 situations for MODBUS communication: flag M1127 for normal
communication and M1129, M1140, M1141 for communication errors. Counter C0 counts
once when any of the 4 flags is ON. Therefore, the program assures the communication
reliability by monitoring the On/Off status of the 4 flags and performs 5 MODBUS
instructions in order by the value in counter C0.

z

Since DTB series TC supports the function code 10H, the program uses MODRW instruction
to write multiple words.

z

Once PLC starts running, the read/write actions for TC will be performed repeatedly
according to [LD=] instructions.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-27

12. Communication Design Examples
12.8

PLC LINK 16 Slaves and Read/Write 16 Data (Word)
M aster PLC

M aster address =K20

EH 2
Rs485 network

Slave1

Slave2

Slave address
=K4

Slave address
=K3

Slave address
=K2

SA

Slave3

SX

SS

Control Purpose:
z

Performing 16 words data exchange by PLC LINK between master PLC and 3 slave PLCs.

Parameter Settings for PLC:
Master/Slave

Station No.

Master PLC

K20 (D1121 = K20)

Slave 1

K2 (D1121 = K2)

Slave 2

K3 (D1121 = K3)

Slave 3

K4 (D1121 = K4)

Communication format
ASCII, 9600, 7, E, 1 (D1120 = H86).
Communication format of all connected
PLCs must be the same.

Ú If PLC can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set the PLC to factory
defaults by clicking ”Communication (C)”> “Format PLC Memory” from the menu bar of WPL
Soft and then set the parameters according to the above table.
Devices:
Device
X0

12-28

Function
Trigger on PLC LINK

M1350

Enabling EASY PLC LINK

M1351

Enabling auto mode on EASY PLC LINK

M1352

Enabling manual mode on EASY PLC LINK

M1353

Enable 32 slave unit linkage and up to 100 data length of data exchange

M1354

Enable simultaneous data read/write in a polling of EASY PLC LINK

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
Control Program:
M1002
MOV

K20

D1121

Set the Master PLC
communication address as K20

MOV

H86

D1120

Set PLC COM2
communication protocol

SET

M1120

MOV

K200

D1129

Set receiving time-out: 200ms

MOV

K2

D1399

Set starting Slave ID as K2

MOV

H1064

D1355

Set starting reference for Master
to read from Slave ID 1: D100. .

MOV

K16

D1434

16 data to be read from Slave ID1

MOV

H10C8

D1415

Set starting reference for Master
to write in Slave ID 1: D200 .

MOV

K16

D1450

16 data to be written in Slave ID1

MOV

H1078

D1356

Set starting reference as for Master
to read from Slave ID 2: D120 .

MOV

K16

D1435

16 data to be read from Slave ID2

MOV

H10DC

D1416

Set starting reference for Master
to write in Slave ID 2: D220

MOV

K16

D1451

16 data to be written in Slave ID2

MOV

H108C

D1357

Set starting reference for Master
to read from Slave ID 3: D140.

MOV

K16

D1436

16 data to be read from Slave ID3

MOV

H10F0

D1417

Set starting reference for Master
to write in Slave ID 3: D240

MOV

K16

D1452

16 data to be written in Slave ID3

SET

M1351

Auto mode

SET

M1350

Enable PLC LINK

Retain communication setting

X0

Program Description:
z

When X0 = ON, the data exchange between Master and 3 Slaves will be performed through
PLC LINK by the ways explained below: the data in D100 ~ D115, D120~D135, and
D140~D155 of the 3 Slaves will be read respectively into D1480 ~ D1495, D1512 ~ D1527
and D1544~ D1559 of the Master, and the data in D1496 ~ D1511, D1528 ~ D1543 and

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-29

12. Communication Design Examples
D1560~D1575 of the Master will be written respectively into D200 ~ D215, D220~D235 and
D240~D255 of the 3 Slaves.
Master PLC *1

Read

D1480~D1495

Write

D1496~D1511

z

Slave PLC *3
D100~D115 of Slave ID 2#
D200~D215 of Slave ID 2#

D1512~D1527

Read

D120~D135 of Slave ID 3#

D1528~D1543

Write

D220~D235 of Slave ID 3#

D1544~D1559

Read

D140~D155 of Slave ID 4#

D1560~D1575

Write

D240~D255 of Slave ID 4#

Assume that the data in D for data exchange between Master and Slave before PLC LINK is
enabled (M1350 = OFF) are as below:
Master PLC

Set value

Slave PLC

Set value

D1480~D1495

0

D100~D115 of Slave ID 2#

1

D1496~D1511

100

D200~D215 of Slave ID 2#

0

D1512~D1527

0

D120~D135 of Slave ID 3#

2

D1528~D1543

200

D220~D235 of Slave ID 3#

0

D1544~D1559

0

D140~D155 of Slave ID 4#

3

D1560~D1575

300

D240~D255 of Slave ID 4#

0

After EASY PLC LINK is enabled (M1350 = ON), the data in D for data exchange becomes:
Master PLC

z

Set value

Slave PLC

Set value

D1480~D1495

1

D100~D115 of Slave ID 2#

1

D1496~D1511

100

D200~D215 of Slave ID 2#

100

D1512~D1527

2

D120~D135 of Slave ID 3#

2

D1528~D1543

200

D220~D235 of Slave ID 3#

200

D1576~D1591

3

D140~D155 of Slave ID 4#

3

D1592~D1607

300

D240~D255 of Slave ID 4#

300

In Master PLC, set the starting Slave ID (D1399 = K2), i.e. Slave ID 2# corresponds to
Slave1, Slave ID 3# corresponds to Slave2, and Slave ID 4# corresponds to Slave3.

z

Station No. of Slave should be continuous and different from the station No. of Master. Only
the SA/SX/SC/SV/EH/EH2 series PLC can be Master, but all DVP-PLC can be Slave.

z

When X0 = ON, PLC LINK will be enabled. If enabling action is failed, M1350/M1351 will be
OFF and X0 needs to be activated again.

12-30

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples

12.9

PLC LINK 32 Slaves and Read/Write 100 Data (Word)
Master PLC

Master address=K10

EH series

RS485 network

Slave1

Slave2

Slave address
=K2

Slave addr ess
=K1
EH series

EH series

Control Purpose:
z

Performing 100 words data exchange by PLC LINK between master PLC and 2 Slave PLCs.

Parameter Settings for PLC:
Master/Slave

Station No.

Master PLC

K20 (D1121 = K20)

Slave 1

K2 (D1121 = K2)

Slave 2

K3 (D1121 = K3)

Communication format
RTU, 19200, 8, N, 2(D1120=H99).
Communication format of all connected PLCs must
be the same.

Ú If PLC can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set the PLC to factory
defaults by clicking ”Communication (C)”> “Format PLC Memory” from the menu bar of WPL
Soft and then set the parameters according to the above table.
Devices:
Device
X0

Function
Trigger on PLC LINK

M1350

Enabling EASY PLC LINK

M1351

Enabling auto mode on EASY PLC LINK

M1352

Enabling manual mode on EASY PLC LINK

M1353

Enable 32 slave unit linkage and up to 100 data length of data exchange

M1354

Enable simultaneous data read/write in a polling of EASY PLC LINK

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-31

12. Communication Design Examples
Control Program:
M1002
Set the Master PLC communication
address as K10

MOV

K10

D1121

MOV

H99

D1120

SET

M1120

Retain communication setting

MOV

K1000

D1129

SET

M1143

Set the communication format
of Master PLC: MODBUS RTU

MOV

K1

D1399

Set starting Slave ID as K1

MOV

H1000

D1355

Set starting reference for
Master to read from Slave ID 1
: D0

MOV

K100

D1434

MOV

K0

D1480

Set starting reference to store the
data read from D0~D99 of Slave 1: D0

MOV

H1064

D1415

Set starting reference for
Master to write in Slave 1: D100

MOV

K100

D1450

100 data to be written in Slave 1

Set communication time-out:
1000ms

MOV

K100

D1496

Set starting reference of Master: D100
D100~D199 of Master will be written
in D100~D199 of Slave 1

MOV

H10C8

D1356

Set starting reference for Master
to read from Slave ID 2: D200

MOV

K100

D1435

100 data to be read from Slave 2

MOV

K200

D1481

Set starting reference to store the
data read from D200~D299 of Slave 2: D200

MOV

H112C

D1416

Set starting reference for Master
to write in Slave 2: D300

MOV

K100

D1451

MOV

K300

D1497

SET

M1353

SET

M1351

Auto mode

SET

M1350

Enable PLC LINK

100 data to be written in Slave 2

Set starting reference of Master: D300
D300~D399 of Master will be written
in D300~D399 of Slave 2
Enable 32 slave unit linkage and up to 100 data
length of data exchange

X0

12-32

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
Program Description:
z

When X0 = ON, the data exchange between Master and 3 Slaves will be performed through
PLC LINK by the ways explained below: D0~D99 of Slave 1 will be read to D0~D99 of
Master. D100~D199 of Master will be written in D100~D199 of Slave 1. D200~D299 of
Slave 2 will be read to D200~D299 of Master. D300~D399 will be written to D300~D399 of
Slave 2.
Master PLC *1

Slave PLC *2

Read

D0~D99
D100~D199
D200~D299
D300~D399

z

D0~D99 of Slave ID 1#

Write
Read
Write

D100~D199 of Slave ID 1#
D200~D299 of Slave ID 2#
D300~D399 of Slave ID 2#

Assume that the data in D for data exchange between Master and Slave before PLC LINK is
enabled (M1350 = OFF) are as below:
Master PLC
D0~D99

Set value
0

Slave PLC

Set value

D0~D99 of Slave ID 1#

1

D100~D199

100

D100~D199 of Slave ID 1#

0

D200~D299

0

D200~D299 of Slave ID 2#

2

D300~D399

200

D300~D399 of Slave ID 2#

0

After EASY PLC LINK is enabled (M1350 = ON), the data in D for data exchange becomes:
Master PLC
D0~D99

z

Set value
1

Slave PLC
D0~D99 of Slave ID 1#

Set value
1

D100~D199

100

D100~D199 of Slave ID 1#

100

D200~D299

2

D200~D299 of Slave ID 2#

2

D300~D399

200

D300~D399 of Slave ID 2#

200

In Master PLC, set the starting Slave ID (D1399 = K1), i.e. Slave ID 1# corresponds to
Slave1 and Slave ID 2# corresponds to Slave2.

z

Station No. of Slave should be continuous and different from the station No. of Master. Only
the SV/EH/EH2 series PLC can be Master, but all DVP-PLC can be Slave.

z

When X0 = ON, PLC LINK will be enabled. If enabling action is failed, M1350/M1351 will be
OFF and X0 needs to be activated again.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-33

12. Communication Design Examples

12.10 LINK between PLC, Delta AC Motor Drive and AC Servo Drive

Wring for Delta ASD-A Series AC Servo drive:
L1
L2

Delta AC servo drive
ASDA series

R

CN1

CN1
24V

VDD 17
COM+ 11
DI1

Servo motor

W

S
T

3 phases AC power

SON

U
V

9

SPD0

DI3 34

SPD1

COM- 45

4.7K
4.7K

CN2

Encoder

Error counter
Electric gear

12-34

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
Control Purpose:
z

Setting and reading the frequency to control the Start/Stop and Forward/ Reverse status of
AC motor drive.

z

Setting and reading the rotation speed of servo motor.

Parameter Settings for AC Motor Drive:
Parameter

Set value

Explanation

02-00

04

RS-485 serial communication. Last used frequency saved.

02-01

03

RS-485 serial communication. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.

09-00

01

Communication address: 01

09-01

01

Communication baud rate: 9600.

09-04

01

MODBUS ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,1>

Ú If AC motor drive can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set P00-02 =
10 (factory defaults) and then set the parameters according to the above table.
Parameter Settings for AC Servo Drive:
Parameter

Set value

Explanation

P0-02

6

Drive Status. Display rotation speed on servo panel

P0-04

6

Status Monitor 1. Data register for current rotation speed

P1-01

2

Control Mode and Output Direction

P2-10

101

Digital Input Terminal 1 (DI1)

P2-12

114

Digital Input Terminal 3 (DI3)

P2-15~17

0

Digital Input Terminal 6 (DI6). No function

P3-00

2

Communication Address Setting

P3-01

1

Transmission Speed, Baud rate: 9600

P3-02

1

MODBUS ASCII mode. Data format: (7, E, 1)

P3-05

2

RS-485 communication format

Ú If AC servo drive can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set P2-08 = 10
(factory defaults) and then set the parameters according to the above table
Devices:
Device
X0

Function
Trigger on PLC LINK

M1350

Enabling EASY PLC LINK

M1351

Enabling auto mode on EASY PLC LINK

M1352

Enabling manual mode on EASY PLC LINK

M1353

Enable 32 slave unit linkage and up to 100 data length of data exchange

M1354

Enable simultaneous data read/write in a polling of EASY PLC LINK

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-35

12. Communication Design Examples
Control Program:
M1002
MOV

K20

D1121

Set Master ID: K20

MOV

H86

D1120

Set Master communication format

SET

M1120

MOV

K200

D1129

Set receiving time-out:
200ms

MOV

K1

D1399

Set staring Slave ID as K1

MOV

H2102

D1355

Set starting reference for
Master to read from Slave ID1:
H2102

MOV

K2

D1434

2 data to be read from AC motor drive

MOV

H2000

D1415

Set starting reference for Master
to write in AC motor drive: H2000

MOV

K2

D1450

2 data to be written in AC motor drive

MOV

H0004

D1356

Set starting reference for Master to
read from AC servo drive: H0004

MOV

K1

D1435

1 data to be read from AC servo drive

MOV

H0109

D1416

Set starting reference for Master
to write in AC servo drive: H0109

MOV

K1

Retain communication setting

D1451 1 data to be written in AC servo drive

X0
M1351

Auto mode

M1350

Enable PLC LINK

Program Description:
z

Registers D1480~D1481 in PLC correspond to parameters H2102~H2103 of AC motor drive.
When X0 = ON, PLC LINK will be enabled and the value of H2102~H2103 will be shown in
D1480~D1481.

z

Registers D1496~D1497 in PLC correspond to parameters H2000~H2001 of AC motor drive.
When X0 = ON, PLC LINK will be enabled and the value in H2000~H2001 can be
determined by the content in D1496~D1497.

z
12-36

Status of AC motor drive can be controlled by setting the value in D1496. (D1496 = H12, AC
DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
motor drive runs forward. D1496 = H1, AC motor drive stops.)
z

Frequency of AC motor drive can be changed by setting the value in D1497. (D1497 =
K4000, the frequency of AC motor drive will be 40Hz.)

z

Before PLC LINK is enabled between PLC and servo motor, turn on “SON” to start servo
and then turn on “SPD0” to ensure the speed mode which controlled by internal registers is
enabled.

z

D1512 in PLC corresponds to communication parameter H0004 of AC servo drive. When X0
= ON, PLC LINK will be enabled and the value of H0004 will be shown in D1512.

z

D1528 in PLC corresponds to communication parameter H0109 of AC servo drive. When X0
= ON, PLC LINK will be enabled and the value of H0109 can be specified in D1528.

z

Rotation speed of servo motor can be changed by the content in D1528. (When D1528 =
K3000, the rotation speed of servo motor will be 3000 rpm.

z

Station No. of Slave should be continuous and different from the station No. of Master.
SA/SX/SC/SV/EH/EH2 series PLC can be Master. ES/EX/SS series can not be Master.

z

When X0 = ON, PLC LINK will be enabled. If enabling action is failed, M1350/M1351 will be
OFF and X0 needs to be activated again..

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-37

12. Communication Design Examples

12.11 LINK between PLC, Delta DTA and DTB Series Temperature Controllers
Master PLC

Master ID
=K 10
PLC

RS-485

Slave1

Slave2

Slave address
=K 1
DTA Temperature Controller

Slave address
=K 2
DTB Temperature controller

Control Purpose:
z

Setting the target temperature and reading the present/target temperature of DTA TC.

z

Setting the target temperature, upper/lower limit of temperature range and reading the
present/target temperature of DTB TC.

Parameter Settings for DTA Series Temperature Controller:
Parameter

Function

Set value

C WE: Write-in function disable/enable

ON

C-SL: ASCII, RTU communication format selection

ASCII

C NO: Communication address setting

1

BPS: Communication baud rate setting

9600

LENGTH: Data length setting

7

PARITY: Parity bit setting

E

STOP BIT: Stop bit setting

1

UNIT: Temperature display unit °C or ℉

°C

Ú If TC can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set the TC to factory
defaults first and then set the parameters according to the above table. DTA TC does not
support writing multiple words, so the number of the written data should set to “1 “.

12-38

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
Parameter Settings for DTB Series Temperature Controller:
Parameter

Function

Set value

C WE: Write-in function disable/enable
C-SL: ASCII, RTU communication format selection

ON
ASCII

C NO: Communication address setting

2

BPS: Communication baud rate setting

9600

LENGTH: Data length setting

7

PARITY: Parity bit setting

E

STOP BIT: Stop bit setting

1

UNIT: Temperature display unit °C or ℉

°C

Ú If TC can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set the TC to factory
defaults first and then set the parameters according to the above table.
Devices:
Device
X0

Function
Trigger on PLC LINK

M1350

Enabling EASY PLC LINK

M1351

Enabling auto mode on EASY PLC LINK

M1352

Enabling manual mode on EASY PLC LINK

M1353

Enable 32 slave unit linkage and up to 100 data length of data exchange

M1354

Enable simultaneous data read/write in a polling of EASY PLC LINK

Control Program:
M1002

DVP-PLC Application Examples

MOV

K10

D1121

Set the Master ID

MOV

H86

D1120

Set the Master COM2
communication format

SET

M1120

MOV

K200

D1129

Set receiving time-out:
200ms

MOV

K1

D1399

Set starting Slave ID as K1

MOV

H4700

D1355

Set starting reference for
Master to read from DTA: H4700

MOV

K2

D1434

2 data to be read from DTA

Retain communication setting

12-39

12. Communication Design Examples

MOV

H4701

D1415

Set starting reference for Master
to write in DTA: H4701

MOV

K1

D1450

1 data to be written in DTA

MOV

H1000

D1356

Set starting reference for Master
to read from DTB: H1000: s

D1435

2 data to be read from DTB

MOV

K2

MOV

H1001

D1416

Set starting reference for Master
to write in DTB: H1001

MOV

K3

D1451

3 data to be written in DTB

SET

M1351

Auto mode

SET

M1350

Enable PLC LINK

X0

Program Description:
z

Registers D1480~D1481 in PLC correspond to communication parameters H4700~H4701
of DTA TC. When X0 = ON, PLC LINK will be enabled and the value of H4700~H4701
(present and target temperature) will be shown in D1480~D1481.

z

Register D1496 in PLC corresponds to communication parameter H4701 of DTA TC. When
X0 = ON, PLC LINK will be enabled and the value of H4701 can be determined by the
content in D1496.

z

Status of DTA TC can be controlled by setting the value in D1496. (D1496 = K300, the target
temperature will be 30°C.)

z

Registers D1512~ D1513 in PLC correspond to communication parameters H1000~H1001
of DTB TC. When X0 = ON, PLC LINK will be enabled and the value of H1000~ H1001
(present and target temperatures) will be shown in D1512~ D1513.

z

Registers D1528~D1530 in PLC correspond to communication parameters H1001~ H1003
of DTB series temperature controller. When X0 = ON, PLC LINK will be enabled and the
value of H1001~ H1003 can be determined by the content in D1528~D1530.

z

Target temperature of DTB can be specified by the value in D1528 (D1528 = K400, the
target temperature will be 40°C.)

z

Upper/lower limit of temperature range of DTB can be specified by the value in D1529~1530.
(D1529 = K500 and D1530 = K10, the upper limit will be 50°C and lower limit will be 1°C.

z

Station No. of Slave should be continuous and different from the station No. of Master.
SA/SX/SC/SV/EH/EH2 series PLC can be Master. ES/EX/SS series can not be Master.

z

When X0 = ON, PLC LINK will be enabled. If enabling action is failed, M1350/M1351 will be
OFF and X0 needs to be activated again.

12-40

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
12.12 Controlling START/STOP of 2 DVP PLCs through Communication (RS Instruction)
Master PLC
Master ID
= K10

EH/EH2
RS-485

Slave2

Slave1

Slave Address
= K2

Slave address
= K1

ES series

SS series

Control Purpose:
z

Controlling start/stop status of 2 Slave PLCs through communication by master PLC.

Parameter Settings:
Master/Slave

Station No.

Master PLC

K10 (D1121 = K10)

Slave 1

K1 (D1121 = K1)

Slave 2

K2 (D1121 = K2)

Communication format
ASCII, 9600, 7, E, 1 (D1120 = H86).
Communication format of all connected
Slave PLCs must be the same.

Ú If PLC can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set the PLC to factory
defaults by clicking ”Communication (C)”> “Format PLC Memory” from the menu bar of WPL
Soft and then set the parameters according to the above table.
Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Start/stop Slave 1

X1

Start/stop Slave 2

M0

Execute the 1st RS instruction

M1

Execute the 2nd RS instruction

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-41

12. Communication Design Examples

Control Program:
M1002
MOV

H86

D1120

SET

M1120

MOV

K300

D1129

MOV

H303A

D100

MOV

H3031

D101

MOV

H3035

D102

MOV

H3343

D103

MOV

H4630

D104

MOV

H3046

D105

MOV

H4230

D106

MOV

HD46

D107

MOV

HA

D108

PLS

M0

MOV

H303A

D100

MOV

H3031

D101

MOV

H3035

D102

MOV

H3343

D103

MOV

H3030

D104

MOV

H3030

D105

MOV

H4230

D106

MOV

HD45

D107

MOV

HA

D108

PLS

M1

Set PLC COM2 communication
protocol: 9600,7,E,1

Retain communication setting
Set receiving time-out:
300ms

X0

When X0 = ON, store the
data which will active
Slave 1 in D100~D108

X0

12-42

When X0 = OFF, store the
data which will stop
Slave 1 in D100~D108

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
X1
MOV

H303A

D100

MOV

H3032

D101

MOV

H3035

D102

MOV

H3343

D103

MOV

H4630

D104

MOV

H3046

D105

MOV

H4230

D106

MOV

HD45

D107

MOV

HA

D108

PLS

M2

MOV

H303A

D100

MOV

H3032

D101

MOV

H3035

D102

MOV

H3343

D103

MOV

H3030

D104

MOV

H3030

D105

MOV

H4230

D106

MOV

HD44

D107

MOV

HA

D108

PLS

M3

When X1 is ON,
store the data
which will
activate Slave 2
in D100~D108

X1

DVP-PLC Application Examples

When X1 is OFF,
store the data
which will
stop Slave 2
in D100~D108

12-43

12. Communication Design Examples
M0
SET

M1122

RS

D100

Sending request

M1
M2
M3
M4
M1000

M1123

K17

D120

K17

Send out the 17 bytes data in D100~D108 and store
the received 17 bytes data in D120~D128
RST

M1123

PLS

M4

RST

M1129

M1129

Reset M1123
Retry after receiving
time-out
Reset M1129

Program Description:
z

Initialize PLC RS-485 communication port and set the communication format as MODBUS
ASCII, 9600, 7, E, 1. The RS-485 communication format of Slave should be the same with
Master PLC.

z

There are 2 situations for RS communication: M1123 for normal communication and M1129
for receiving timeout. When communication time-out occurred, M4 can be used to retry.

12-44

z

When X0 = ON, Slave 1 will start running. When X0 = OFF, Slave 1 will stop.

z

When X1 = ON, Slave 2 will start running. When X1 = OFF, Slave 2 will stop.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples

12.13 Communication between Delta PLC and Siemens MM420 Frequency Inverter (RS
Instruction)
Control Purpose:
z

Controlling the start/stop of Siemens MM420 series AC motor drive through communication
by master PLC.

Parameter Settings for MM420 AC Motor Drive:
Parameter

Set value

Function

P0003

3

User access level: expert

P0700

5

Selection of command source: USS on COM link (RS-485)

P1000

5

Selection of frequency setpoint: USS on COM link (RS-485)

P2010

6

USS baud rate: 9600bps

P2011

0

USS address: 0

Ú If Siemens MM420 can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set MM420
to factory defaults: set P0010 = 30, P0970 = 1. Then set the parameters according to the
above table.
Devices:
Device
X0

Function
Start/stop switch

Control Program:
X0
MOV

H602

D100

MOV

H400

D101

MOV

H337F

D102

MOV

H7F33

D103

PLS

M0

MOV

H602

D100

MOV

H400

D101

When X0 = ON,
send the data
which starts
MM 420 to run
forward in 40Hz
to D100~D103

X0

DVP-PLC Application Examples

MOV

H7A

D102

MOV

H7A00

D103

PLS

M1

When X0 = OFF,
send the data
which stops
MM 420 to
D100~D103

12-45

12. Communication Design Examples
M0
SET

M 1122

RS

D100

Sending request

M1
M2

M1000
K8

D120

K8

Send out the 8 bytes data in D100~D103 and store
the received data in D120~D123

M1123

RST

M1123

PLS

M2

RST

M1129

Reset M1123.

M1129
Retry after receiving time-out
Reset M1129

Program Description:
z

Initialize PLC RS-485 communication port and set the communication format as 9600, 8, E,
1. The RS-485 communication format of MM420 (set by P2010) should be the same with
Master PLC.

z

When X0 = ON, MM420 will be started to run forward in 40Hz.
PLCDMM420, PLC sends: 02 06 00 047F 3333 7F
MM420DPLC, PLC receives: 02 06 00 FB34 3333 CB
Registers for sent data (PLC sends out message):
Register

DATA

Explanation

D100 low

02H

Head. Fixed as 02H. (start of the message)

D100 high

06H

The number of the following bytes

D101 low

00H

Station No. (range: 0~31, corresponding to hex 00H~1FH)

D101 high

04H

D102 low

7FH

D102 high

33H

D103 low

33H

D103 high

7FH

Control word (starting MM420. Refer to Remarks for definitions.)
Frequency (4000H = base frequency 50Hz, 3333H = 40Hz)
Tail. (XOR result of all the bytes before this byte)

Registers for received data (MM420 responds with messages):
Register

12-46

DATA

Explanation

D120 low

02H

Head. Fixed as 02H (start of the message)

D120 high

06H

The number of the following bytes
DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples

Register

z

DATA

D121 low

00H

D121 high

FBH

D122 low

34H

D122 high

33H

D123 low

33H

D123 high

CBH

Explanation
Station No. (range: 0~31, corresponding to hex 00H~1FH)
Status word (Refer to Remarks for definitions)
Frequency (4000H = base frequency 50Hz, 3333H = 40Hz)
Tail. (XOR result of all the bytes before this byte)

When X0 = OFF, MM420 will stop.
PLCDMM420,PLC sends: 02 06 00 047A 0000 7A
MM420DPLC,PLC receives: 02 06 00 FB11 0000 EE
Register for sent data (PLC sends out message):
Register

DATA

Explanation

D100 low

02H

Head. Fixed as 02H (start of the message)

D100 high

06H

The number of the following bytes

D101 low

00H

Station No. (range: 0~31, corresponding to hex 00H~1FH)

D101 high

04H

D102 low

7AH

D102 high

00H

D103 low

00H

D103 high

7AH

Control word (Refer to Remarks for definitions)
Frequency (0000H = 0 Hz.)
Tail. (XOR result of all the bytes before this byte)

Register for received data (MM420 responds with messages):
Register

z

DATA

Explanation

D120 low

02H

Head. Fixed as 02H (start of the message)

D120 high

06H

The number of the following bytes

D121 low

00H

Station No. (range: 0~31, corresponding to hex 00H~1FH)

D121 high

FBH

D122 low

11H

D122 high

00H

D123 low

00H

D123 high

EEH

Status word (Refer to Remarks for definitions)
Frequency (0000H = 0 Hz.)
Tail. (XOR result of all the bytes before this byte)

There are 2 situations for RS communication: M1123 for normal communication and M1129
for receiving timeout. When communication time-out occurred, M2 can be used to retry

Remarks:
z

Siemens MM420 series AC motor drive uses USS communication protocol and allows
maximum of one master connected with 31 slaves. Slave ID: 0~31

The structure of the communication message:

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-47

12. Communication Design Examples

STX

LGE
Data length

ADR
Address

BCC

Process data area

Data area (N words)

One byte

One byte

PZD

PKW
Parameter data area

Checksum
One byte

z

For STX, LGE, ADR and BCC areas, the data length is fixed as 1 byte.

z

STX is fixed as 02H, meaning the start of the message.

z

LGE is the number of bytes between ADR area and BCC area.

z

ADR is the USS communication address. Range: 0~31 corresponds to hex 00H ~1FH.

z

Data area is divided into PKW area and PZD area. PKW area is used for reading/writing the
parameters of AC motor drive and contains 0~4 word. (Usually 4 words, refer to the setting
of P2013). PZD area is used for controlling AC motor drive including frequency setting and
contains 0~4 word. (Usually 2 words, refer to the setting of P2012). The first word is control
word for AC motor drive and the second is for setting the frequency of AC motor drive.

z

PKW and PZD can be used either or both. Usually, only PZD is used for controlling the
status and frequency setting of AC motor drive. This program uses PZD with the length of 2
words and the structure is as follows:
02

06

00

047F 3333

STX

LGE

ADR

DATA(PZD)

7F
BCC

In the above figure, 047FH is the control word for starting AC motor drive. 3333H is the
frequency. Since H4000 corresponds to base frequency 50Hz, 3333H corresponds to 40Hz.
z

BCC checksum: the XOR result of the bytes from STX to PZD.
For example: 02H XOR 06H XOR 00H XOR 04H XOR 7FH XOR 33H XOR 33 = H7F

z

12-48

Definition of the control word for AC motor drive in PZD area (PLC sends out messages):
Bit

Explanation

00

ON (ramp up enabled)/OFF1 (ramp down
disabled)

01

Bit status
0 No (OFF1)

1 Yes (ON)

OFF2: Coast to standstill

0 Yes

1 No

02

OFF3: Quick ramp down

0 Yes

1 No

03

Pulses enabled

0 No

1 Yes

04

RFG (ramp function generator) enabled

0 No

1 Yes

05

RFG (ramp function generator) start

0 No

1 Yes

06

Set value of frequency enabled

0 No

1 Yes

07

Fault acknowledge

0 No

1 Yes

08

JOG right

0 No

1 Yes

09

JOG left

0 No

1 Yes

10

Controlled by PLC

0 No

1 Yes

11

Reverse

0 No

1 Yes

12

Reserved

-

-

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples

Bit

Explanation

Bit status

13

MOP (motor potentiometer) up

0 No

1 Yes

14

MOP (motor potentiometer) down

0 No

1 Yes

15

Local/remote control

0 No

1 Yes

Note: Among the control word from by PLC to AC motor drive, bit 10 must be set as 1. If nit
10 is 0, the control word will be invalid and AC motor drive will go on running as before.
z

Definition of the status word of AC motor drive in PZD area (AC motor drive responds with
messages):
Bit

Explanation

00

Drive ready

01

Bit status
0 No (OFF1)

1 Yes (ON)

Drive ready to run

0 No

1 Yes

02

Drive running

0 No

1 Yes

03

Drive fault active

0 No

1 Yes

04

OFF2 active

0 Yes

1 No

05

OFF3 enabled

0 No

1 Yes

06

Switch on inhibit active

0 No

1 Yes

07

Drive warning active

0 No

1 Yes

08

Excessive deviation

0 Yes

1 No

09

PZDI (process data) control

0 No

1 Yes

10

Maximum frequency reached

0 No

1 Yes

11

Over current alarm

0 Yes

1 No

12

Motor holding brake enabled

0 Yes

1 No

13

Motor overload

0 Yes

1 No

14

Motor running forward

0 No

1 Yes

15

Inverter overload

0 Yes

1 No

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-49

12. Communication Design Examples

12.14 Communication between Delta PLC and Danfoss VLT6000 Series Adjustable
Frequency Drive (RS Instruction)
Control Purpose:
z

Controlling the start/stop status and reading out the frequency of Danfoss VLT6000 series
frequency drive through communication by master PLC.

Parameter Settings for VLT6000 Series frequency drive:
Parameter

Set value

Explanation

P500

0

FC protocol : Serial communication protocol

P501

1

FC communication address: 1

P502

5

FC communication baud rate: 9600 bps

P503

1

Coasting stop controlled by serial communication

P504

1

DC braking controlled by serial communication

P505

1

Start controlled by serial communication

Ú If Danfoss VLT6000 frequency inverter can not run normally due to improper parameters,
users can set VLT6000 to factory defaults: set P620 = 3 and press OK. Then set the
parameters according to the above table.
Devices:
DEVICE

Function

X0

Start/stop switch

M0

Executing the 1st RS instruction

M1

Executing the 2nd RS instruction

Control Program:
M1002

12-50

MOV

H87

D1120

SET

M1120

MOV

K200

D1129

MOV

HE02

D100

MOV

H1201

D101

MOV

H0

D102

MOV

H0

D103

MOV

H0

D104

MOV

H400

D105

Set communication
format: 9600,8,E,1

Retain communication setting
Set receiving timeout:
200ms

Start VLT6000 to run
forward in 25Hz
and read the running
frequency in D100~D107

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples

MOV

H207F

D106

MOV

H4400

D107

MOV

H602

D200

MOV

H401

D201

MOV

H77

D202

MOV

H7600

D203

PLS

M0

Execute the 1st RS instruction
when M0=ON

PLS

M1

Execute the 2nd RS instruction
when M1=ON

SET

M1122

RS

D100

Send the data which
will stop VFT 6000
to D200~D203

X0
X0
M0

Sending request

M1

M2
X0

X1

D120

K16

When M0 = ON, send out 16 bytes data in D100~ D107
and store the received data from slave in D120~D127
RS

M1123

K16

D200

K8

D220

K8

When M1 = ON, send out 8 bytes data in D200~D203
and store the received data from slave in D220~D223
RST

M1123

PLS

M2

RST

M1129

M1129

Reset M1123
Retry after receiving time-out
Reset M1129

Program Description:
z

Initialize PLC RS-485 communication port and set the communication format as, 9600, 8, E,
1. The RS-485 communication format of VLT6000 should be the same with Master PLC.

z

When X0 = ON, VLT6000 starts to run forward in 40Hz and its output frequency will be read
out.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-51

12. Communication Design Examples
PLCDVLT6000, PLC sends: 02 0E 01 1200 0000 00000000 047F 2000 44
VLT6000DPLC, PLC receives: 02 0E 01 1200 0000 000000FA 0F07 1FFF 0D
Register for sent data (PLC sends out messages):
Register

Data

D100 low

02H

Head, fixed as 02H (start of the message)

D100 high

0EH

The number of the following bytes

D101 low

01H

D101 high

12H

D102 low

00H

Station No. (range: 0~31, corresponding to hex 00H~1FH)
1H: function code for reading parameters
PKE
200H: parameter No. P512 (output
frequency)

D102 high

00H

D103 low

00H

D103 high

00H

D104 low

00H

D104 high

00H

D105 low

00H

D105 high

04H

D106 low

7FH

D106 high

20H

D107 low

00H

D107 high

44H

Explanation

IND
PKW area

Index area (used in indexed parameters,
such as P615. Not used in this program.)

PWE high

Value: 1 (In read status: 0. In write status:
high word will be read)

PWE low

Value: 2 (In read status: 0. In write status:
low word will be read)

PCD1 area

Control word (starting VLT6000. For the definition,
please refer to Remarks.)

PCD2 area

Frequency (4000H corresponds to base frequency
50Hz and 2000H corresponds to 25Hz)

BCC area

Tail. (XOR result of all the bytes before this byte)

Register for received data (VLT6000 responds with messages):

12-52

Register

Data

D120 low

02H

Head, fixed as 02H (start of the message)

D120 high

0EH

The number of the following bytes

D121 low

01H

Station No. (range: 0~31, corresponding to hex 00H~1FH)

D121 high

12H

D122 low

00H

D122 high

00H

D123 low

00H

D123 high

00H

D124 low

00H

D124 high

00H

D125 low

FAH

D125 high

0FH

D126 low

07H

D126 high

1FH

D127 low

FFH

D127 high

0DH

Explanation

PKE

1H: function code for reading parameters
200H: parameter No. P512 (output
frequency)

IND

Index area (used in indexed parameters,
such as P615. This program doesn’t use.)

PWEhigh

High word will be read

PWElow

Low word will be read (00FAH
corresponds to the decimal value 250
which means the frequency of 25Hz.

PKW area

PCD1 area

Status word (For the definition, please refer to
Remarks.)

PCD2 area

Frequency (4000H corresponds to the base
frequency 50Hz and 1FFFHZ corresponds to 25Hz)

BCC area

Tail. (XOR result of all the bytes before this byte)
DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
z

When X0 = OFF, AC motor drive will stop. (Only PCD area is applied in this message).
PLCDVLT6000, PLC sends: 02 06 01 0477 0000 76
VLT6000DPLC, PLC receives: 02 06 01 0603 0000 00
Register for sent data (PLC sends out messages):
Register

Data

Explanation

D200 low

02H

Head, fixed as 02H (start of the message)

D200 high

06H

The number of the following bytes

D201 low

01H

Station No. (range: 0~31, corresponding to hex 00H~1FH)

D201 high

04H

D202 low

77H

Control byte (starting AC motor drive. For the definition,
please refer to Remarks.)

D202 high

00H

D203 low

00H

D203 high

76H

Frequency (0000H corresponding to 0Hz)
Tail. (XOR result of all the bytes before this byte)

Register for received data (VLT6000 responds with messages):
Register

z

Data

Explanation

D220 low

02H

Head, fixed as 02H (start of the message)

D220 high

06H

The number of the following bytes

D221 low

01H

Station No. (range: 0~31, corresponding to hex 00H~1FH)

D221 high

06H

D222 low

03H

Status byte (starting AC motor drive. For the definition, please
refer to Remarks.)

D222 high

00H

D223 low

00H

D223 high

00H

Frequency (0000H corresponding to 0Hz)
Tail. (XOR result of all the bytes before this byte)

There are 2 situations for RS communication: M1123 for normal communication and M1129
for receiving timeout. When communication time-out occurred, M2 can be used to retry.

Remarks:
z

There are 3 protocols for Danfoss VLT6000 series inverter: FC (default), Metasys N2 and LS
FLN. This program uses FC protocol which is similar with USS protocol used by Siemens
MM420 series inverter: allows maximum of one master connected with 31 slaves. Slave ID:
0~31.
The structure of the communication message:
STX
Head
One byte

z

LGE
Data length

ADR
Address

One byte One byte

PKW
Parameter
area

CH
Text area

PCD
Process data area

Data area (N words)

BCC
Checksum
One byte

The definitions of STX, LGE, ADR and BCC areas of FC protocol are the same as that of
USS protocol. Please refer to Remarks in example 12.13 for description of USS protocol.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12-53

12. Communication Design Examples
z

3 kinds of messages can be used in data area:
1. Includes parameter area and process area. Used for transferring parameters in
master-slave system. The 6 words are as below:
PKE

IND

PWE1

PCD1

PWE2

PCD2

Process
area( PZD)

Parameter area(PKW)

2. Only process area. Consist of control word (status word) and frequency. The 2 words are
as below:
PCD1

PCD2

Process area (PZD)

3. Text area for reading/writing text through data area (used when reading/writing
parameter P621-631):
PKE

IND

CH1

CH2

...........

CHn

PCD1

Process
area (PZD)

Text area (PKW)

z

Definition of the control word for AC motor drive in PZD area:
Bit

12-54

PCD2

Bit status = 0

Bit status = 1

00

-

Preset ref. lsb

01

-

Preset ref. msb

02

DC braking

-

03

Coasting stop

-

04

Quick stop

-

05

Freeze output frequency

-

06

Ramp stop

Start

07

-

Reset

08

-

JOG

09

No function

10

Data not invalid

Data valid

11

-

Activate relay 01

12

-

Activate relay 02

13

-

Choice of setup lsb

14

-

Choice of setup msb

15

-

Reversing

DVP-PLC Application Examples

12. Communication Design Examples
z

Definition of the status word for AC motor drive in PCD area
Bit

Bit status = 0

Bit status = 1

00

Trip

Control ready

01

-

Drive ready

02

-

Stand by

03

No trip

Trip

04

Not in use

05

Not in use

06

Not in use

07

No warning

Warning

08

Speed≠reference

Speed = reference

09

Local operation

Serial comm. control

10

Out of frequency range

-

11

Disable operation

Operation indication

12

No function

13

-

Voltage warning high/low

14

-

Current limit

15

DVP-PLC Application Examples

Thermal warning

12-55

12. Communication Design Examples
MEMO

12-56

DVP-PLC Application Examples

13 . Real Time Calendar Time Design Examples

13.1

TRD/TWR/TCMP - Office Bell Timing Control

Control Purpose:
z

There are 4 moments the office bell will ring: on-duty / off-duty time in the morning and
on-duty / off-duty time in the afternoon. When the time is reached, the bell will ring
immediately and last for 1 minute. Users can set the 4 moments and adjust the current time
at any time.

z

Set the ringing time and adjust the current time.

Devices:
Device

Function

M0

Adjust current time

M1

Start the office bell

Y0

Ring the office bell

D0~D6

Store the read Real Time Clock (RTC) data

D200~D206

Store the RTC data to be written in PLC

D300~D311

Store the on-duty / off-duty time

Control Program:
M1000
K1

TWR

D200

When M0 is triggered, the contents in D200~
D206 will be written into RTC built in PLC

TRD

D0

When M1=ON, store the current time of RTC in D0~D6.
D4, D5 and D6 store the data of Hour/Minute/Second

TCMP

D300

M0
M1

D200

D301

K4

Set the written data of Year/Week/
Month/Day as K1 so as to prevent
executing errors of TWR instruction

FMOV

D302

D4

M10

When M1 = ON, compare the current time in D4~D6 with the morning
on-duty time set in D300~D302. If they are equal, M11 will be ON.
TCMP

D303

D304

D305

D4

M13

When M1 = ON, compare the current time in D4~D6 with the morning
off-duty time set in D303~D305. If they are equal, M14 will be ON.
TCMP

D306

D307

D308

D4

M16

When M1 = ON, compare the current time in D4~D6 with the afternoon
on-duty time set in D306~D308. If they are equal, M17 will be ON.
TCMP

D309

D310

D311

D4

M19

When M1 = ON, compare the current time in D4~D6 with the afternoon
off-duty time set in D309~D311. If they are equal, M20 will be ON.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

13-1

13 . Real Time Calendar Time Design Examples
M11
SET

Y0

TMR

T0

RST

Y0

When any of M11, M14, M17 and M20 is triggered,
Y0 will be ON and the bell will ring..

M14
M17
M20
Y0
T0

K600
The ring will last for 1 minute. Y0 will be
reset and the bell will stop ringing.

Program Description:
z

The value in D200~D206 and D300~D311 can be set by WPLSoft or HMI.

z

To avoid the execution error of TWR instruction, the program uses [FMOV K1 D200 K4]
instruction at the beginning. This program operates only the data of Hour/Minute/Second in
D204~D206 but not the data of Year/Day/Month/Date in D200~D203. For TWR instruction,
the setting range: 00~99 for Year, 1~7 for Day(Mon ~Sun), 1~12 for Month and 1~31 for
Date. If the values in D200~D203 are out of the above range, the program will regard it as
an operation error and the instruction will not be executed and the Hour/Minute/Second data
can’t be written either. Therefore, the program sets the Year/Week/Month/Day to K1 to fit the
above range and makes sure TWR instruction can be executed for writing in
Hour/Minute/Second data.

z

13-2

D4, D5 and D6 store the Hour/Minute/Second of the current time read form RTC.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

13 . Real Time Calendar Time Design Examples

13.2

TRD/TZCP - Control of Warehouse Automatic Door
Y2/Y3

o
X6

n

X4

Open Close
X1
X0
Open Close
o
X2
X3

n

Y0/Y1

X7

Control Purpose:
z

The opening hours of the warehouse are from 7:30~22:30, so the door should open at 7:30
and close at 22:30 automatically.

z

There are 2 sets of control buttons(Open/Close) in the control room for opening or closing
the door manually for special situations.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Manual open button for door 1 .

X1

Manual close button for door 1

X2

Manual open button for door 2

X3

Manual close button for door 2

X4

Upper sensor of door 1.

X5

Lower sensor of door 1.

X6

Upper sensor of door 2.

X7

Lower sensor of door 2.

Y0

Motor of door 1 run forward to open the door

Y1

Motor of door 1 run reverse to close the door

Y2

Motor of door 2 run forward to open the door

Y3

Motor of door 2 run reverse to close the door

DVP-PLC Application Examples

13-3

13 . Real Time Calendar Time Design Examples
Control Program:
M1000
MOV

K7
K30

D11

MOV

K0

D12

MOV

K22

D20

MOV

K30

D21

MOV

K0

D22

TRD

D0

Read the RTC of PLC and store the data
in D0~D6. D4~D6 store Hour/Min/Sec data

TZ CP

D10

D20

SET

Y0

SET

Y2

M11

Y2

Set the lower limit of
warehouse opening
hours as 7:30

MOV

M1000

Y0

D10

X4

Set the upper limit of
warehouse opening
hours as 22:30

D4

M10

Time zone compare
the set time with the
read current time

AM7:30~PM10:30, door 1 and door 2 executes
opening action until the upper sensor is activated.

RST

Y0

RST

Y2

SET

Y1

SET

Y3

RST

Y1

RST

Y3

SET

Y0

Press door 1 manual open button and door 1 will
be opening until the upper sensor is activated

SET

Y1

Press door 1 manual close button and door 1 will
be closing until the lower sensor is activated

SET

Y2

Press door 2 manual open button and door 2 will
be opening until the upper sensor is activated

SET

Y3

Press door 2 manual open button and door 2 will
be closing until the lower sensor is activated

X6

M10
M12
Y1
Y3

X5
X7

X0
X1
X2
X3

13-4

PM10:30~AM7:30, door 1 and door 2 executes
closing action until the lower sensor is activated

DVP-PLC Application Examples

13 . Real Time Calendar Time Design Examples
Program Description:
z

The program performs control of warehouse automatic door by a RTC Time Zone Compare
instruction (TZCP). Through the Time Read instruction (TRD), the current time in RTC can
be read in D0~D6. D4, D5 and D6 store the Hour/Min/Sec data.

z

When Y0 = ON, the motor of door 1will run forward to execute opening action until upper
sensor is activated (X4 = ON).

z

When Y1 = ON, the motor of door 1 will run reverse to execute closing action until the lower
sensor in activated (X5 = ON).

z

The opening and closing actions of door 2 are the same with that of door 1.

z

For some special situations, the opening and closing actions of door 1 and door 2 can also
be performed by pressing manual open buttons (X0/X2) and manual close buttons (X1/X3)
in the control room.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

13-5

13 . Real Time Calendar Time Design Examples
13.3

HOUR - Control of Switching Motors after a Long Time Running

Control Purpose:
z

Controlling the automatic motor switching between main motor and auxiliary motor.

In some special applications, we use several motors running by turns to protect each motor and
extend their service life. In this program, there are 2 motors running by turns in the cycle: 2 days
(48 hours) for the main motor, then 1 day (24 hours) for the auxiliary motor.
Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Start/Stop of the motor

Y0

Starting the main motor

Y1

Starting the auxiliary motor

M10

M10 = ON when set time of the main motor reached

M11

M11 = ON when set time of the auxiliary motor reached

D0~D1

Storing the current running time of the main motor

D2~D3

Storing the current running time of the auxiliary motor

Control Program:
X0

M0
HOUR

K48

D0

M10

When X0 = ON, M0 = OFF, the timer starts counting.
Set value: 48 hr. D0~D1 store the current running time
of main motor. M10 will be ON when current running time
reaches the set value..
Y0
M0
HOUR

When X0 = ON, M0 = OFF, Y0 will be
ON and the main motor will b e started.
K24

D2

M11

When X0 = ON, M0 = ON, the timer starts counting.
Set value: 24 hr. D2~D3 store the current running time
of main motor. M10 will be ON when current running time
reaches the set value.
Y1

When X0 = ON and M0 = ON, Y1 will be
ON and the auxiliary motor will b e started.

M10

13-6

SET

M0

ZRST

D0

RST

M10

When M10 = ON, SET M0 instruction
will be executed for stopping the main
motor and starting the auxiliary motor.
D1

Clear the current running
time of the main motor

Reset M10

DVP-PLC Application Examples

13 . Real Time Calendar Time Design Examples
M11
RST

M0

ZRST

D2

RST

M11

When M11 = ON, RST M0 instruction
will be executed for stopping the auxiliary
motor and starting the main motor
D3

Clear the current running
time of the auxiliary motor

Reset M11

Program Description:
z

When X0 = OFF, Y0 and Y1 = OFF, both main / auxiliary motor will not run.

z

When X0 = ON, the running status of Y0 (main motor) and Y1 (aux. motor) will be decided
by the ON/OFF status of M0 so as to control the two motors running in turns.

z

For main motor, D0 and D1 record the current time measured in hour and the current time
that is less than an hour (0~3599s). For auxiliary motor, D2 and D3 record the current time
measured in hour and the current time that is less than an hour (0~3599s).

z

16-bit instruction supports the set time up to 32,767 hours and 32-bit instruction supports
the set time up to 2,147,483,647 hours.

z

The timer will go on timing after the set time is reached. For restart timing, users need to
clear the current time stored in D0~D3 and reset flag M10 and M11.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

13-7

13 . Real Time Calendar Time Design Examples
MEMO

13-8

DVP-PLC Application Examples

14. Simple Positioning Design Examples

14.1

Simple positioning Demonstration System of Delta ASDA series AC servo Drive

Reverse limit
sensor X1

Processing
device

DOG
sensor X2

Forward limit
sensor X0
Servo motor

Zero point
ASDA series AC servo drive
DOP-A series HMI

EH

WPLSoft

Y0 pulse output
Y1 forward/ reverse
Y4 pulse clear

Control Purpose:
z

Building a simple demonstrating system of position control by the application of Delta PLC
and Delta ASDA servo drive.

z

Performing Zero Return, Drive to Increment and Drive to Absolute through pulse sending of
PLC.

Devices:
Device

Function

M0

Zero return switch

M1

Switch of running forward for 10 rotations

M2

Switch of running reverse for 10 rotations

M3

Switch of absolute designation: 400,000

M4

Switch of absolute designation: -50,000

M10

Servo ON switch

M11

Error reset switch

M12

Switch of stopping pulse output.

M13

Switch of Emergency stop

X0

Forward limit sensor

X1

Reverse limit sensor

X2

DOG signal sensor

X3

Receiving Servo Ready signal (corresponding to M20)

X4

Receiving At Zero Speed signal (corresponding to M21)

X5

Receiving Homing Completed signal (corresponding to M22)

X6

Receiving At Positioning Completed signal (corresponding to M23)

X7

Receiving Alarm Enabled signal (corresponding to M24)

DVP-PLC Application Examples

14-1

14. Simple Positioning Design Examples
Y0

Pulse output

Y1

Forward / Reverse direction control

Y4

Clear pulse register of servo

Y6

Servo ON

Y7

Error reset

Y10

Forward inhibit limit

Y11

Reverse inhibit limit

Y12

Emergency stop

M20

Servo ready

M21

At zero speed

M22

Homing completed

M23

At positioning completed

M24

Alarm enabled

Parameter Settings for ASD-A AC Servo Drive:
Parameter

Set value

Function

P0-02

2

Drive Status

P1-00

2

External pulse input type: Pulse+ Direction

P1-01

0

Control Mode and Output Direction

P2-10

101

Digital Input Terminal 1 (DI1)

P2-11

104

Digital Input Terminal 2 (DI2)

P2-12

102

Digital Input Terminal 3 (DI3)

P2-13

122

Digital Input Terminal 4 (DI4)

P2-14

123

Digital Input Terminal 5 (DI5)

P2-15

121

Digital Input Terminal 6 (DI6)

P2-16

0

Digital Input Terminal 7 (DI7)

P2-17

0

Digital Input Terminal 8 (DI8)

P2-18

101

Digital Output Terminal 1 (DO1)

P2-19

103

Digital Output Terminal 2 (DO2)

P2-20

109

Digital Output Terminal 3 (DO3)

P2-21

105

Digital Output Terminal 4 (DO4)

P2-22

107

Digital Output Terminal 5 (DO5)

Ú If AC servo drive can not run normally due to improper parameters, users can set P2-08 = 10
(factory defaults) and then set the parameters according to the above table.

14-2

DVP-PLC Application Examples

14. Simple Positioning Design Examples
Wiring for PLC and AC Servo Drive:
Dleta servo drive

Delta PLC

ASDA Series

DVP32EH00T
220VAC

L

220VAC
Single
phase

N

3-phase
power

R

U

S

V
W

T

Servo
motor

+24V
S/S
24G
X0

DO_COM

X1

Forward limit
Reverse limit

X2

DOG

X3

SRDY - Servo ready
ZSPD - At zero speed
HOME - Homing completed
TPOS- At positioning completed
ALRM -Servo Alarm activated

X4
X5
X6
X7

24V
VDD 17
COM+ 11

7 DO1+
6 DO1-

SRDY

5 DO2+
4 DO23 DO3+
2 DO3-

ZSPD

1 DO4+
26 DO427 DO5+
28 DO5-

HOME
TPOS
ALRM
DO_COM

X10
X11

Encoder

X12
X13

Error
counter

X14
X15

OZ
/OZ

X16
X17
Pulse clear

Y4
C4

50
24

Eletric
gear

DI2 10
COM- 45

Servo ON

Y6

Servo error reset

Y7
C4

Forward inhibit limit

Y10

Reverse inhibit limit

Y11

Emergency stop

Y12

DI1

9

DI3 34
COM- 45
DI4

8

DI5 33
11
DI6 32

C5
DC24V
VDD 17
PU-HI 35
Pulse output

Y0
C0
Y1

Forward/Reverse direction

1KΩ

PLS 41
COM- 47
SIGN 37

C1

DVP-PLC Application Examples

14-3

14. Simple Positioning Design Examples
Control program:
M1002
MOV

K200

D1343

Set accel/decel time to 200ms

M10
Y6

Servo ON

Y7

Error reset

M11

M0 M1 M2 M3 M4
DZRN

K10000

M1346

Clear pulse register of servo

K5000

X2

Y0

Zero return

M1 M0 M2 M3 M4
DDRVI K100000 K20000

Y0

Y1

Run forward for
10 rotations

DDRVI K-100000 K20000

Y0

Y1

Run reverse for
10 rotations

DDRVA K400000 K200000

Y0

Y1

Drive to absolute
designation 400,000

DDRVA K-50000 K200000

Y0

Y1

Drive to absolute
designation -50,000

M2 M0 M1 M3 M4

M3 M0 M1 M2 M4

M4 M0 M1 M2 M3
M1029
ZRST

M0

M4

Reset M0~M4 after positioning
is completed

X0
Y10

Forward inhibit limit

Y11

Reverse inhibit limit

X1

M12
M1334
M13

Stopping pulse output

Y12

Emergency stop

M20

Servo ready

M21

Servo at zero speed

M22

Servo homing completed

M23

Servo at positioning completed

M24

Error alarm

X3
X4

X5
X6
X7

14-4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

14. Simple Positioning Design Examples

Program Description:
z

The M devices work as switches and status display can be designed by Delta DOP-A HMI or
WPLSoft program.

z

Power up servo drive, X3 will be ON (servo ready) if there is no alarm signal. Press servo
ON switch and M10 will be ON to activate Y6 (Servo ON)

z

When zero return switch M0 = ON, servo drive will execute zero return action. When DOG
signal sensor is activated, servo drive will switch the current speed to JOG speed of 5KHz.
When X2 is OFF, servo motor will stop running immediately and zero return is completed.

z

When the switch of 10 rotations forward is pressed (M1 = ON), servo motor will execute
Drive to Increment instruction and stop after running forward for 10 rotations.

z

When the switch of 10 rotations reverse is pressed (M2 = ON), servo motor will execute
Drive to Increment instruction and stop after running reverse for 10 rotations.

z

When the switch of absolute designation 40,0000 is pressed (M3 = ON), servo motor will
execute Drive to Absolute instruction and stop after positioning completed.

z

When the switch of absolute designation -50,000 is pressed (M4 = ON), servo motor will
execute Drive to Absolute instruction and stop after positioning completed.

z

If the processing device touches the forward limit sensor (X0 = ON, Y10 = ON), servo motor
will stop and the alarm will be enabled (M24 = ON).

z

If the processing device touches the reverse limit sensor (X1 = ON, Y11 = On), servo motor
will stop and the alarm will be enabled (M24 = ON)..

z

If servo alarm is enabled, press error reset switch M11 to clear the alarm. Once the alarm is
cleared, the program can resume positioning actions.

z

When the switch of stopping pulse output is ON (M12 = ON), PLC pulse output will be
paused and the number of the output pulses will be stored in the register. When M12 = OFF,
PLC will resume pulse output from the number of stored pulses.

z

Press emergency stop switch (M13 = ON), and AC servo drive will stop immediately. When
M13 = OFF, for positioning, servo drive will not complete remaining distance.

z

M1346 in the program is used for clearing the pulse register after zero return is completed.
When M1346 activated, Y4 of PLC will send a 20ms pulse to clear pulses so as to display 0
on the servo panel (corresponding to servo parameter: P0-02, set as 0)

z

M1029 in the program is used for resetting M0~M4 to ensure that every positioning
instruction can be executed properly.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

14-5

14. Simple Positioning Design Examples

14.2

Draw DELTA LOGO by 2-axis Synchronous Motion

Control Purpose:
z

Executing Drive to Absolute (DDRVA) and 2-axis synchronous motion instructions (DPPMA
and DPPMR) to draw DELTA LOGO.

z

Executing DDRVA instruction to control the up/down movement of the pen on the 3rd axis.

z

The locus is as follows:
P0(0,0) Th e ori gin
P1(32500,-500)

P5(34400,-20500)

P6(48800,-33300)
P9(43000,-35800)
P4(10300,-43600)
P8(34500,-43000)

P10(50800,-43000)

P11(43000,-50800)
P2(600,-53400)

P7(23100,-53400)

P3(61500,-53400)

Devices:
Device

14-6

Function

X0

When X0 = ON, 2-axis synchronous motion is enabled.

Y0

X axis pulse output device

DVP-PLC Application Examples

14. Simple Positioning Design Examples

Device

Function

Y1

X axis direction signal output device

Y2

Y axis pulse output device

Y3

Y axis direction signal output device

Y4

The 3rd axis pulse output device

Y5

The 3rd axis direction signal output device

D0

Drawing steps

D10

Parameter setting

Control Program:
X0

= D0

K1

MOVP

K1

D0

DDRVA

K5000

K10000

MOVP

K2

D0

Y4

Y5

Lift up the pen
on the 3rd axis

K-500

K10000

Y0

2-axis positioning
from P 0 to P1

Y4

Y5

Put down the pen
on the 3rd-axis

M1036

= D0

K2

DPPMA K32500

= D0

K3

DDRVA

K0

K10000

MOVP

K4

D0

K600

M1036

K4

DPPMA

K-53400 K10000

Y0

2-axis positioning
from P 1 to P2

= D0

K5

DPPMA K61500 K-53400 K10000

Y0

2-axis positioning
from P 2 to P3

= D0

K6

DPPMA K32500

K-500

K10000

Y0

2-axis positioning
from P 3 to P1

= D0

K7

DDRVA

K5000

K10000

Y4

Y5

Lift up the pen
on the 3rd axis

MOVP

K8

D0
Y0

2-axis positioning
from P 1 to P4

Y4

Y5

Put down the pen
on the 3r d axis

Draw the triangle

= D0

M1036

= D0

K8

DPPMA K10300 K-43600 K10000

= D0

K9

DDRVA

K0

K10000

MOVP

K10

D0

M1036

K 10

DCIMA

K34400 K-20500

D10

Y0

2-axis positioning
from P 4 to P5

= D0

K 11

DCIMA K48800 K-33300

D10

Y0

2-axis positioning
from P 5 to P6

= D0

K 12

DCIMA K23100 K-53400

D10

Y0

2-axis positioning
from P 6 to P7

= D0

K 13

DCIMA K10300 K-43600

D10

Y0

2-axis positioning
from P 7 to P4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

Draw the ellipse

= D0

14-7

14. Simple Positioning Design Examples

= D0

K14

DDRVA

K5000

K10000

MOVP

K15

D0

Y4

Y5

M1036

= D0

K15

Y0

2-aixs positioning
from P 4 to P8

Y4

Y5

Put down the pen
on the 3rd axis

DPPMA K34500 K-43000 K10000

= D0 K16

DDRVA

K0

K10000

MOVP

K17

D0

Lift up the pen
on the 3rd axis

M1036

K17

DCIMA K43000 K-35800

D10

Y0

2-aixs positioning
from P 8 to P9

= D0

K18

DCIMA K50800 K-43000

D10

Y0

2-aixs positioning
from P 9 to P10

= D0

K19

DCIMA K43000 K-50800

D10

Y0

2-aixs positioning
from P 10 to P11

= D0

K20

DCIMA

K34500 K-43000

D10

Y0

2-aixs positioning
from P 11 to P8

Draw the circle

= D0

M1029
INCP

D0

END

Program Description:
z

When X0 = ON, the content in D0 = 1, 2-axis synchronous motion will be enabled to draw
DELTA LOGO.
Step 1: Lift up the pen on the 3rd-axis. Move it from P0 to P1.
Step 2: Put down the pen at P1. Draw with the following locus: P1→ P2→ P3→ P1. Lift up
the pen and the triangle is completed.
Step 3: Move the pen from P1 to P4 and put down the pen at P4. Draw with the following
locus: P4→ P5→ P6→ P7→ P4. Lift up the pen and the ellipse is completed.
Step 4: Move the pen from P4 to P8 and put down the pen at P8. Draw with the following
locus: P8→ P9→ P10→ P11→ P8. Lift up the pen and the circle is completed and
DELTA logo is accomplished.

z

M1036 is the flag for indicating the completion of pen movement on 3rd axis. When M1036 =
ON, the program will execute next step.

z

M1029 is he flag for indicating the completion of pen movement on X/Y axis. When M1029 =
ON, the content in D0 will increase by 1 and the program will enter next step.

14-8

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples

15.1

ALT - Auto Blackboard Cleaner
(Right side limit switch) X2

(Left side limit switch) X1

Y0
Move Left

Y1
Move right

X0(Clean)

Control Purpose:
z

Controlling the auto cleaner to move left / move right when Clean is pressed.

z

When the auto cleaner touches the limit switches of left side or right side, the cleaner will
stop. Next time when Clean is pressed again, the cleaner will move to the opposite direction.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 = ON when Clean is pressed.

X1

X1 = ON when left side limit switch is touched.

X2

X2 = ON when right side limit switch is touched.

Y0

Move left

Y1

Move right

Control Program:
X0
ALT
M0

M0

M0

X1

X2

Y0

Move left

Y1

Move right

Program Description:
z

When Clean is pressed, X0 will be activated one time to execute ALT instruction. M0 will be
ON, the cleaner will move left until it touches the left side limit switch. X1 = ON, and Y0 will

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15-1

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
be OFF. The cleaner will stop working.
z

When Clean is pressed again, X0 will be activated again to switch the ON status of M0 to be
OFF. Therefore, Y1 will be ON and the cleaner will move right until it touches the right side
limit switch. X2 = ON, and Y1 will be OFF. The cleaner will stop at the current position.

z

Wherever the location of the cleaner is, the cleaner will move to the opposite direction every
time when Clean is pressed.

15-2

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples

15.2

RAMP - Ramp Control of Crane

X0
X1
X2
Up Down Stop

Control Purpose:
z

The load of the crane is quite big, so the motor requires ramp up and ramp down control
during gradual start as well as gradual stop process.

z

Apply Delta analog output MPU DVP10SX to generate voltages of 0~10V for controlling the
frequency of AC motor drive, and the drive will output variable frequency current to control
rotation speed of the crane motor.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 = ON when Up is pressed.

X1

X1 = ON when Down is pressed.

X2

X2 = ON when Stop is pressed.

Y0

Motor running forward (Lifting goods)

Y1

Motor running reverse (Landing goods)

Control Program:
M1002
SET

M1039
Set the scan cycle to 20ms

DVP-PLC Application Examples

MOV

K20

SET

M1026

D1039
Enabling RAMP mode

15-3

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
X0
SET

Y0

RST

Y1

MOV

K0

D0

MOV

K2000

D1

SET

M0

SET

Y1

RST

Y0

MOV

K0

Motor running forward
to lift the goods

Set the value of start/end
ramp signal when lifting goods

Executing gradual lifting

X1

MOV

K2000

SET

M1

MOV

K2000

Motor running reverse
to land the goods

D0
D1

Set the value of start/end
ramp signal when landing goods

Executing gradual landing

X2

MOV

K0

SET

M2

RAMP

D0

D0
D1

Set the value of start/end
ramp signal when stopping goods

M0
M1
M2

D1

D2

K100

At the start of lifting or landing goods, the content in D2 will
increase gradually from 0 to 2,000 in 2 sec. When stopping
goods, the content in D2 will decrease gradually from 2,000
to 0 in 2 sec.

M1029
ZRST

M0

M2

MOV

D2

D1116

M1000

Reset M0~M2 when Ramp process
is completed.

Send the content in D2 to D1116. The content in D1116 determines the output
voltage and the current in the first analog output channel of DVP10SX PLC

Program Description:
z

This program applies to PLCs with analog output function, such as DVP20EX and DVP10SX
series MPU. In DVP10SX, when the content in D1116 changes from K0 to K2000, the output
voltage of the first channel will vary from 0 to 10V.

z

The parameter of RAMP instruction is directly related to the scan cycle, so users should set
the scan cycle at the start of the program first, then the duration of ramp signal can be fixed.

15-4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
In this program, the scan cycle is fixed as 20ms and the scan times of RAMP instruction are
100. Therefore the ramp duration is 2s.
z

When the button Up is pressed (M0 = ON), the crane will perform gradual start to lift goods
and the voltage output will increase from 0 to 10V in 2s. When the crane reaches the target
height, operator can press the button Stop (M2 = ON) to execute gradual stop. The voltage
output will decrease from 10 to 0V in 2s. The process is as follows:

X0
M0
X2
M2
Gradual start

Gradual stop

2000
(10V)

0
(0V)
Scan times: 100

Scan times:100

M1029

z

The goods landing process also requires the same ramp up (gradual start) and ramp down
(gradual stop) duration.

z

The frequency of AC motor drive is in proportion to the output voltage of PLC. For example,
the frequency of Delta VFD-M series AC motor drive varies from 0 to 60Hz while the output
voltage of DVP10SX varies from 0 to 10V. In addition, the motor rotation speed is in
proportion to the frequency of drive. Therefore, gradual start and gradual stop can be
performed by controlling the variation of output voltage on DVP10SX.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15-5

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples

15.3

INCD - Traffic Lights Control (Incremental Drum Sequencer)

Vertical direction
Horizontal direction

Control Purpose:
z

Performing traffic lights sequence control at the intersection. In both vertical and horizontal
directions, the traffic lights are set as the following sequence: Red lights ON for 60s , Yellow
lights ON for 3s and green lights ON for 52s and green lights flashing for 5s.

z

The timing diagrams are as follows:
60s
Red
3s
Vert ical

Yellow

Green
52s

5s

Red

60s

Horizontal

3s
Yellow

Green
52s

15-6

5s

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
Devices:
Device

Function

X1

Switch of the traffic lights control program

Y0

Red light (vertical)

Y1

Yellow light (vertical)

Y2

Green light (vertical)

Y10

Red light (horizontal)

Y11

Yellow light (horizontal)

Y12

Green light (horizontal)

Control Program:
M1002

X0

MOV

K52

D500

Set the ON time of vertical
green light as 52s

MOV

K5

D501

Set the ON time of vertical
green light flashing as 5s

MOV

K3

D502

Set the ON time of vertical
yellow light as 3s

MOV

K52

D503

Set the ON time of horizontal
green light as 52s

MOV

K5

D504

Set the ON time of horizontal
green light flashing as 5s

MOV

K3

D505

Set the ON time of horizontal
yellow light as 3s

CNT

C0

K1000

INCD

D500

C0

M1013

M100

C0 counts once every 1s
M100

K6

The corresponding M devices will be ON according to
the set time in D500~D505
Y2

Vertical green light ON

Y1

Vertical yellow light ON

Y0

Vertical red light ON

M101 M1013
M102
M103
M104
M105

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15-7

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
M103
Y12

Horizontal green light ON

Y11

Horizontal yellow light ON

Y10

Horizontal red light ON

M104 M1013
M105
M100
M101
M102

Program Description:
z

“Incremental Drum Sequencer” is a concept performing repetitive step-by-step process. In
this program, when present value in counter C0 reaches the set value in D 500~D505, the
corresponding output devices M100~M105 will be ON and counter C0 will be reset for
executing next step.

z

In order to simplify the program, INCD (Incremental Drum Sequencer) instruction is used
here to control the traffic lights.

z

Before the execution of INCD instruction, use MOV instruction to write all the set values into
D500 ~ D505 in advance.

15-8

Set value

Output device

Set value

Output device

D500 = 52

M100

D503 = 52

M103

D501 = 5

M101

D504 = 5

M104

D502 = 3

M102

D505 = 3

M105

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples

15.4

ABSD - Adding Materials in Different Intervals (Absolute Drum Sequencer)

Control Purpose:
z

Adding A, B, C materials for production during specified intervals within 60 sec.

z

Adding material A in the intervals of 10s~20s, 30s~40s and 50~55s, material B in the interval
of 0~10s, 20s~25s and 40s~50s, and material C in the interval of 20s~25s, 30s~35s and
40s~45s.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

Switch of material adding control program

Y0

Adding material A

Y1

Adding material B

Y2

Adding material C

Control Program:
M1002
MOV

K10

D500

MOV

K20

D501

MOV

K30

D502

MOV

K40

D503

MOV

K50

D504

MOV

K55

D505

MOV

K0

D506

MOV

K10

D507

MOV

K20

D508

Set the time interval for
adding material A

M1002

DVP-PLC Application Examples

MOV

K25

D509

MOV

K40

D510

MOV

K50

D511

Set the time interval for
adding material B

15-9

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
M1002
MOV

K20

D512

MOV

K25

D513

MOV

K30

D514

MOV

K35

D515

MOV

K40

D516

MOV

K45

D517

RST

C0

CNT

C0

K60

ABSD

D500

C0

C0
X0

Set the time interval for
adding material C

Reset C0 when one production
cycle is completed

M1013

M100

M100

K9

When the present value in C0 reaches time intervals
for adding materials, the corresponding output devices
M100~M108 will be ON.
Y0

Add material A

Y1

Add material B

Y2

Add material C

M101
M102
M103
M104
M105
M106
M107
M108

Program Description:
z

“Absolute Drum Sequencer” is a concept performing repetitive process consists of multiple
steps which could be executed in the same interval. In this program, when present value in
counter C0 reaches the set value in D 500~D517, the corresponding output devices
M100~M108 will be ON to execute specified actions within single interval.

z

15-10

Before the execution of ABSD instruction, use MOV instruction to write all the set values into
DVP-PLC Application Examples

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
D500 ~ D517 in advance.
Set value

Output device

Set value

Output device

D500 = 10

M100

D509 = 25

M104

D501 = 20

M100

D510 = 40

M105

D502 = 30

M101

D511 = 50

M105

D503 = 40

M101

D512 = 20

M106

D504 = 50

M102

D513 = 25

M106

D505 = 55

M102

D514 = 30

M107

D506 = 0

M103

D515 = 35

M107

D507 = 10

M103

D516 = 40

M108

D508 = 20

M104

D517 = 45

M108

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15-11

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples

15.5

IST - Electroplating Process Auto Control
Limit of plating Limit of recovery
X2
tank
X1 tank

Left-limit
X0

X5.
Upper-limit
of hook

Move Left Y3

Limit of rinse
tank
X3

Right-limit
X4

Y2 Move Right

Y0 Hook up

Lower-limit
of hook
X6

Clipping location

Plating tank

Recovery tank

Rinse tank

X15. Zero return ON

Power ON
Power OFF

Conveyor belt

X16. Auto start
X17. Auto stop

Hook
up

Move
left

X20
Hook
down

X22
X24
Move
right Release

X21

X23

Single Step
X12

Clip

Zero return
X11

X13 One cycle

Manual
X10

X14 Continuous

X25

Control Purpose:
z

Applying PLC on auto control process of PCB electroplating. There is a traveling crane
equipped with a lifting hook in the production line. The hook has a clip for clipping and
releasing the workpiece. The traveling crane and the lifting hook are controlled by 2 motors
and a control panel. In addition, there are plating tank, recovery tank and rinse tank in the
process of plating workpiece, recycling plating solution and cleaning workpiece.

z

Process:
Clip the workpiece → Put it in the plating tank for 280 minutes → lift it to the upper-limit and
stay for 28s → soak it in the recovery tank for 30 minutes → lift it to the upper-limit and stay
for 15s → clean it in the rinse tank for 30s → lift it to the upper-limit and stay for 15s → put it
on the conveyor belt.

z

3 operation modes:
Manual: select manual mode (X10 = ON) and enable/disable output devices by controlling
corresponding switches (X20~X25).
Zero return: select zero return mode (X11 = ON) and press the zero return button X15 to
execute this function.

15-12

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
Auto: (Single step/One cycle/Continuous)
1.

Single step operation: select Single step (X12 = ON). Execute one step when
pushing Auto start (X16) one time.

2.

One cycle operation: select One cycle (X13 = ON). Press Auto start (X16) at the
zero point and the program will execute one cycle of plating process. If Auto
stop (X17) is pressed, the process will be stopped. The program will continue to
finish the cycle if Auto start is pressed again.

3.

Continuous operation: select Continuous (X14 = ON). Press Auto start (X16) at
the zero point and the program will perform continuous plating process for
cycles until Auto stop (17) is pressed. If Auto stop is pressed, the program will
finish the cycle and stop at zero point.

Devices:
Device

Function

X0

X0 = ON when the left-limit switch is activated.

X1

X1 = ON when the limit switch of plating tank is activated.

X2

X2 = ON when the limit switch of recovery tank is activated.

X3

X3 = ON when the limit switch of rinse tank is activated.

X4

X4 = ON when the right-limit switch is activated.

X5

X5 = ON when the upper-limit switch of lifting hook is activated.

X6

X6 = ON when the lower-limit switch of lifting hook is activated.

X10

X10 = ON when Manual mode is selected

X11

X11 = ON when Zero return mode is selected

X12

X12 = ON when Single step mode is selected

X13

X13 = ON when One cycle mode is selected

X14

X14 = ON when Continuous mode is selected

X15

X15 = ON when Zero return ON is pressed.

X16

X16 = ON when Auto start is pressed.

X17

X17 = ON when Auto stop is pressed.

X20

X20 = ON when Hook up is pressed.

X21

X21 = ON when Hook down is pressed.

X22

X22 = ON when Move left is pressed.

X23

X23 = ON when Move right is pressed.

X24

X24 = ON when Clip is pressed.

X25

X25 = ON when Release is pressed

Y0

Hook up

Y1

Hook down

Y2

Move right

Y3

Move left

Y4

Clipping

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15-13

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
Control Program:
X0

X5
M1044

Zero point condition

M1000
IST
S0
S

X20

Y1

X10

S20

S51

X5
X6

X23 X5

Y3

X4

X22 X5

Y2

X0

Hook up

Y1

Hook down

Y2

Traveling crane move right

Y3

Traveling crane move left

X24
SET

Y4

Clip

RST

Y4

Release clip

SET

S10

Enable Zero
return mode

RST

Y4

Release clip

RST

Y1

Hook down stops

Manual operation mode

X21 Y0

Y0

X25
S1
S

X15

S10
S

Y0
X5
S11
S

SET

S11

RST

Y2

Y3

Traveling crane
move right stops

Zero return mode

Hook goes up
to upper limit (X5 = ON)

Traveling crane move left
to left limit (X0 = ON)

X0
S12
S

S2 M1041 M1044
S
S20
S

SET

S12

SET

M1043

RST

S12

Zero return
completed

SET

S20

Enable Auto
operation mode

Y1

X6
S30
S

Enable zero return
completed flag

Hook goes down
to lower limit (X6 = ON)

SET

S30

SET

Y4

TMR

T0

SET

S31

K20

Clip and
hold for 2s

T0

15-14

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
S31
S

X5
Y0

Hook goes up
to upper limit (X5 = ON)

X5
SET
S32

X1
Y2

S

S32
Traveling crane move right to the
limit switch of plating tank (X1 = ON)

X1
SET
S33
S

X6
Y1

S33
Hook goes down
to lower limit (X6 = ON)

X6
S34
S

SET

S34

TMR

T1

T1
K24000

T1
CNT

C0

SET

S35

K7

Dip the workpiece in the plating
tank for 280 minutes

C0
S35
S

X5
Y0

Hook goes up
to upper limit (X5 = ON)

X5
S36
S

SET

S36

TMR

T2

SET

S37

K280

Hold the workpiece upon
the plating tank for 28s

T2
S37
S

X2
Y2

Traveling crane move right to the limit
switch of the recovery tank (X2 = ON)

X2
SET
S38
S

X6
Y1

S38
Hook goes down
to lower limit (X6 = ON)

X6
S39
S

SET

S39

TMR

T0

SET

S40

K18000

Dip the workpiece in the
recovery tank for 30 minutes

T0
S40
S

X5
Y0
X5

S41
S

Hook goes up
to upper limit (X5 = ON)

SET

S41

TMR

T4

SET

S42

K150

Hold the workpiece upon
the recovery tank for 15s

T4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15-15

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
S42
S

X3
Y2

Traveling crane move right to the
limit switch of rinse tank (X3 = ON)

X3
SET
S43
S

X6
Y1

S43
Hook goes down
to lower limit (X6 = ON)

X6
S44
S

SET

S44

TMR

T5

SET

S45

K300

Clean workpiece in
rinse tank for 30s

T5
S45
S

X5
Y0

Hook goes up
to upper limit (X5 = ON)

X5
S46
S

SET

S46

TMR

T6

SET

S47

K150

Hold the workpiece upon
the rinse tank for 15s

T6
S47
S

X4
Y2

Traveling crane move right
to right limit (X4 = ON)

X4
SET
S48
S

X6
Y1
X6

S49
S

S48
Hook goes down
to lower limit (X6 = ON)

SET

S49

RST

Y4

TMR

T7

SET

S50

Release clip
K20

T7
S50
S

X5
Y0
X5
SET

S51
S

X0
Y3

Hook goes up
to upper limit (X5 = ON)
S51
Traveling crane move left
to left limit (X0 = ON)

X0
S2
RET

15-16

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
Program Description:
z

The program uses Auto/Manual control instructions (IST) to perform auto control process of
PCB electroplating. When IST instruction is applied, S10 ~ S19 can not be used as general
step points, but only can be used for zero return. When S0 ~ S9 are in use, S0 ~ S2 are
specified for manual operation mode, zero return mode and auto operation mode. Therefore,
the content of the 3 steps should be designed first in this program.

z

When zero return mode is selected, no zero return action will occur if any step between S10
~ S19 is ON. When auto mode is selected, no action will occur if any step in Auto mode is
ON or if M1043 is ON.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15-17

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
15.6

FTC - Fuzzy Temperature Control of the Oven

Control Purpose:
z

The heating environment of the oven is “fast heating environment” (D13 = K16) and the
target temperature is 120℃ (D10 = K1200). In order to get the best control results, the
program uses FTC together with GPWM instructions to perform fuzzy temperature control.

z

Apply DVP04PT-S temperature measurement module for measuring the present
temperature of the oven and transferring the result to DVP12SA. After execution of FTC
instruction, PLC outputs the operation results in D22 to the input of GPWM instruction.
GPWM instruction outputs width modulatable pulses (width determined by D22) by Y0 to
control the heater and fuzzy temperature control of the oven is completed.
D22

Y0
D30

Devices:
Device

Function

M1

Enabling the execution of FTC instruction

Y0

PWM Pulse output device

D10

Storing the target temperature

D11

Storing the present temperature

D12

Storing FTC sampling time parameter

D13

Storing FTC temperature control parameter

D22

Storing the operation results of FTC instruction

D30

Storing the pulse output cycle of GPWM instruction

Control Program:
M1002
MOV

K1200

D10

TO

K0

K2

Set target temperature:120℃
K2

K1

Set the average time of DVP04PT Channel 1: 2 times

15-18

MOV

K40

D12

Set sampling time: 4s

MOV

K16

D13

Set the heating environment
to "fast heating environment

MOV

K4000

D30

Set the pulse output cycle of
GPWM: 4s

SET

M1

Execute FTC and GPWM instructions

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
M1

FTC

D10

D11

D12

D22

Store the operation result of FTC instruction in D22

GPWM

D22

D30

Y0

Y0 outputs pulses (width determined by D22)

M1013

FROM

K0

K6

D11

K1

Sample present temp. every 1 sec and store
it in D11

Program Description:
z

FTC instruction is a handy instruction exclusively designed for temperature control. Unlike
the large amount of parameters required by PID instruction, users only need to set a few
parameters.

z

Format of FTC instruction:
FTC

S1

S2

S3

D

S1 → Set value (SV) (Range:1~5000, shown as 0.1°~500°)
S2 → Present value (PV) (Range:1~5000, shown as 0.1°~500°)
S3 → Parameter (Users need to set parameters S3 and S3+1)
D → Output value (MV) (Range: 0 ~ S3*100)
z

Setting of S3 and S3+1:
Device
S3

S3+1

Function
Sampling time (Ts)

b0: temperature unit
b1: filter function
b2: heating environment
b3~b15: reserved

Range
1~200 (unit: 100ms)
b0 = 0 means ℃; b0 = 1 means ℉
b1 = 0 means without filter function;
b1 = 1 means with filter function
b2 = 1 Slow heating environment
b3 = 1 General heating environment
b4 = 1 Fast heating environment
b5 = 1 High-speed heating environment

z

In practical application, users usually need to adjust S3 and S3+1 several times to get the
best control results. The basic rules are as follows:
1.

Sampling time should be set to 2 times more than the sampling time of the temperature
sensor, generally between 2s ~6s.

2.

The cycle time of GPWM instruction is the same with the sampling time of FTC
instruction, but the unit for GPWM cycle time is 1ms.

3.

Properly decrease SV of the sampling time if the control duration is too long.

4.

Properly increase SV of the sampling time if the fluctuations occur frequently.

5.

“General heating environment” (b3 = 1) is the default setting for the heating

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15-19

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
environment (bit2~bit5 of S3+1).

z

6.

Select “slow heating environment” (b2 = 1) if the control duration is too long.

7.

Select “fast heating environment” (b4 = 1) if overheating or fluctuations occur.

Adjustment of parameters S3 and S3+1:
Assume parameters S3 and S3+1 of FTC instruction are set as D12 = K60 (6s), D13 = K8
(b3 = 1) and pulse output cycle time of GPWM instruction is set as D30 = K6000 ( =
D12*100), the curve for the control is shown as the below diagram:

As shown in the diagram above, we can see that after about 48 minutes, the temperature is
able to reach the target temperature with ±1℃ accuracy and exceed approx. 10°C of the
target temperature. Due to that the temperature once exceeds the target temperature, we
modify the heating environment into “fast heating environment”, i.e. D13 = K16 (b4 = 1). The
results are shown in the diagram below.

From the diagram above, we see that though the temperature no longer exceeds the target
15-20

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
temperature, it still needs to take more than 1 hour and 15 minutes to reach the target
temperature with ± 1℃ accuracy. It seems that we have chosen the right environment, but
the sampling time is too long, resulting in the extension of heating time. Therefore, we modify
the sampling time to 2 seconds, i.e. D12 = K20 (2s) and D30 = K2000 (= D12*100). The
results are shown in the diagram below.

From the diagram above, we see that the control system becomes too sensitive and leads to
up and down fluctuations. Therefore, we modify the sampling time to 4s, i.e. D12 = K40 (4s)
and D30 = K4000 (= D12*100). The results are shown in the diagram below.

From the diagram above, we see that the overall control time has been shorten as 37
minutes and no exceeding or fluctuations occur. The basic requirements of the control
system are satisfied.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15-21

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
15.7

PID - Oven Temperature Control (Auto-tuning for PID Temperature Control)

Control Purpose:
z

Execute auto-tuning function of PID instruction to control the temperature of the oven when
the oven is in unknown temperature environment. The target temperature is 80℃.

z

Apply DVP04PT-S temperature module for measuring the present temperature of the oven
and transferring the results to PLC. The PLC will execute parameter auto-tuning function
(D204 = K3) to operate the best PID parameters and automatically change the control
direction as “Exclusively for the adjusted temperature control” (D204 = K4).

z

PLC outputs the operation results (adjusted parameter) in D0 to the input of GPWM
instruction. Y0 will output PWM pulses (width determined by D0) to control the heater and
PID temperature control is accomplished.
D0

Y0

D20

Devices:
Device

Function

M1

Executing PID instruction

Y0

Outputting adjustable pulses

D0

Storing PID operation result

D10

Storing the target temperature

D11

Storing the present temperature

D20

Storing pulse output cycle of GPWM instruction

D200

Storing PID sampling time parameter

Control Program:
M1002
MOV

K800

D10

Set target temp: 80 ℃

MOV

K400

D200

Set sampling time: 4s

MOV

K4000

D20

Set cycle time of GPWM
instruction: 4s

TO

K0

K2

K2

K1

Set the average time of DVP04PT Channel 1:2 times

15-22

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
M1013
FROM

K0

K6

D11

K1

Sample PV of the oven every 1s and store it in D11

M0

MOV

K3

D204

RST

M0

PID

D10

Set the control direction
as temperature auto-tuning

M1
D11

D200

D0

Store PID operation result in D200
GPWM

D0

D20

Y0

Program Description:
z

Format of PID instruction:
PID

S1

S2

S3

D

S1 → Set value (SV)
S2 → Present value (PV)
S3 → Parameter (Users need to set and adjust it. For the definition, refer to PID parameter
table in the last part of this example)
D → Output value (MV) (D has to be the data register area with latched function)
z

There are a lot of circumstances where PID instruction can be applied; therefore, please
choose the control functions appropriately. In this example, the parameter auto-tuning for
temperature is only for the temperature control, users cannot use it in a speed or pressure
control environment or errors could occur.

z

Generally, adjusting control parameters of PID requires experience and repetitive tests.
(except the auto-tuning function in temperature control environment) The common
parameter adjusting steps are as below:
Step 1: Set KI and KD as 0 and KP as 5, 10, 20 and 40. Record the SV and PV respectively
and the results are as the figure below.
1.5

KP =40

SV=1

K P =20

KP =10

1

K P =5
0.5

0

DVP-PLC Application Examples

0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1

Time (sec)

15-23

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples

Step 2: From the figure, we can see that when KP = 40, there will be over-reaction, so we will
not select it. When KP = 20, the PV reaction curve will be close to SV and there will
not be over-reaction, but due to its fast start-up with big transient MV, we will
consider to put it aside. When KP = 10, the PV reaction curve will get close to SV
value more smoothly, so we will use it. Finally when KP = 5, we will not consider it
due to the slow reaction.
Step 3: Select KP = 10 and adjust KI from small to big (e.g. 1, 2, 4 to 8). KI should not be
bigger than KP. Adjust KD from small to big (e.g. 0.01, 0.05, 0.1 and 0.2). KD should
not exceed 10% of KP. Finally we obtain the figure of PV and SV below.
1.5

PV=SV
1

0.5

0

K P =10,K I =8,KD=0.2

0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1

Time (sec)

Note: This example is only for your reference. Please adjust your parameters to proper ones
according to your actual condition of the control system.
z

In the temperature control environment, Delta PLC provides auto-tuning on parameters of
PID instruction, so users can get good control results without parameter adjusting steps .
See below for the auto-tuning process in this example:
1.

Initial adjustment. Operate the most suitable parameter for PID temperature control
and store the result in D200~D219. See the reaction curve below:

Auto tuning area
S3 +4 = K3

15-24

PID control area
S3 +4 = k4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples
2.

Use the adjusted parameter in D200~D219 to control temperature. The curve becomes
as below:

From the figure above, we can see that the temperature control after auto-tuning is working
fine and we use only approximately 20 minutes for the control.
z

PID sampling time should be set the same with the cycle time of GPWM instruction, but its
unit is 10ms, which is different from the unit 1ms of GPWM instruction.

z

Sampling time of PV should be set to 2 times more than the sampling time of PID, generally
between 2s ~6s.

z

PID parameter table of S3 for 16-bit instruction:
Device No.

Function

Range

Explanation
If TS is less than 1 program scan time,
PID instruction will be executed for 1
program scan time. If TS= 0, PID
instruction will not be enabled. The
minimum TS has to be longer than the
program scan time.

Sampling time (TS)
(unit: 10ms)

1~2,000
(unit: 10ms)

+1:

Proportional gain
(KP)

0~30,000 (%)

+2:

Integral gain (KI)

0~30,000 (%)

+3:

Differential gain
(KD)

+4:

Control direction
(DIR)

-3,000~30,000
(%)
0: automatic control
1: forward control (E = SV - PV)
2: inverse control (E = PV - SV)
3: Auto-tuning of parameter exclusively for the temperature
control. The device will automatically become K4 when
the auto-tuning is completed and be filled in with the
appropriate parameter KP, KI and KD (not available in the
32-bit instruction).
4: Exclusively for the adjusted temperature control (not
available in the 32-bit instruction).
5: automatic control(with upper/lower bounds of integral
value). Only supported by SV_V1.2 / EH2_V1.2 / SA /
SA_V1.8 / SC_V1.6 or higher version PLC.

:

DVP-PLC Application Examples

If SV is bigger than the max. value, the
output will be the max. value.

15-25

15. Handy Instruction Design Examples

+5:

The range that error
value (E) doesn’t
0~32,767
work

+6:

Upper bound of
output value (MV)

-32,768~ 32,767

+7:

Lower bound of
output value (MV)

-32,768~ 32,767

+8:

Upper bound of
integral value

-32,768~ 32,767

+9:

Lower bound of
integral value

-32,768~ 32,767

+10,11:

Accumulated
integral value

32-bit floating
point

+12:

The previous PV

-

~

+13:

Ex: when S3 +5 is set as 5, MV of E
between -5 and 5 will be 0.
Ex: if S3 +6 is set as 1,000, the output
will be 1,000 when MV is bigger than
1,000. S3 +6 has to be bigger or equal
S3 +7; otherwise the upper bound and
lower bound will switch.
Ex: if S3 +7 is set as -1,000, the output
will be -1,000 when MV is smaller than
-1,000.
Ex: if S3 +8 is set as 1,000, the output
will be 1,000 when the integral value is
bigger than 1,000 and the integration
will stop. S3 +8 has to be bigger or
equal S3 +9; otherwise the upper bound
and lower bound will switch.
Ex: if S3 +9 is set as -1,000, the output
will be -1,000 when the integral value is
smaller than -1,000 and the integration
will stop.
The accumulated integral value is only
for reference. You can still clear or
modify it (in 32-bit floating point)
according to your need.
The previous PV is only for reference.
You can still modify it according to your
need.

For system use only.

+19:

‹

When parameter setting exceeds its range, the upper bound and lower bound will
become the setting value. However, if the motion direction (DIR) exceeds the range, it
will be set to 0.

‹

The maximum error of sampling time TS = - (1 scan time + 1ms) ~ + (1 scan time).
When the error affects the output, please fix the scan time or execute PID instruction in
the interruption subroutine of the timer.

‹

PV of PID instruction has to be stable before the execution of PID instruction. If you are
to extract the input value of DVP04AD/04DA/06XA/04PT/04TC for PID operation,
please be aware of the A/D conversion time of these modules.

15-26

DVP-PLC Application Examples

16. Network Connection Design Examples

16.1

Ethernet Connection

PC Master
Ethernet

DVPEN01

DVPEN01

DVP28SV

DVP2 8SV

DVPEN01

DVPEN01

P OW ER

P OW ER

R S-2 32

R S-2 32

1 00 M

1 00 M

L IN K

L IN K

R S-2 32

DVP28SV

DVP28SV

R S-2 32

L AN

L AN

PLC_A

PLC_B

Control Purpose:
z

Setting up network parameters of DVPEN01-SL directly on the PC
(1) IP of PC executing WPLSoft: 192.168.0.3
(2) Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0; Gateway: 192.168.0.1
(3) Set IP of PLC_A: 192.168.0.4; PLC_B: 192.168.0.5
(4) Connect the PC and DVPEN01-SL by RJ-45 cable
Note: Both PC and DVPEN01-SL have to adopt static IP.

z

Writing the time of RTC in PLC_B into D0 ~ D6 of PLC_A
(1) Adopting static IP。
(2) IP of PLC_A: 192.168.0.4
(3) IP of PLC_B: 192.168.0.5
(4) Update form PLC_B to PLC_A

Devices:
Device
M1013

Function
1s clock pulse

PLC_B M1

Write the data into DVPEN01-SL module

PLC_B M2

Check if data exchange is successfully executed.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

16-1

16. Network Connection Design Examples

Settings:

16-2

z

Select Communication Setting in WPLSoft.

z

Select Ethernet in connection setup and click OK.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

16. Network Connection Design Examples

z

Click Auto-Search icon to search for all DVPEN01-SL modules in the network.

z

Designate a DVPEN01-SL and double click to open the setup page.

z

The setup window will appear as below.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

16-3

16. Network Connection Design Examples
z

Switch to Data Exchange window.

z

Check Enable Data Exchange box. Enter IP address of PLC_A :192.168.0.4 in No. 1 Data
Exchange Host IP column. Click OK to complete the setting.

Control Program:
z

Program of PLC_A:
M1013
FROM

K100

K49

D0

K7

The data received every one second are stored
in CR#49 ~ CR#55 and written into D0 ~ D6.
END

16-4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

16. Network Connection Design Examples
z

Program of PLC_B:
M1000

M1013

M2

TRD

D100

SET

M1

TOP

K100

M1

The data exchange will be executed
every one second

M1
K28

K1

K1

Write the communication address of the destination PLC in CR#28

TOP

K100

K29

D100

K7

Write the data in RTC into CR#29 ~ CR#35

TOP

K100

K14

K0

K1

TOP

K100

K13

K1

K1

Write 1 into CR#13 to start the data exchange

SET

M2

RST

M1

FROM

K100

M2
K14

D14

K1

The received data are stored in CR#14 and witten into D14

= D14 K2

RST

M2

= D14 K3

RST

M2

CR#14 = 2 refers to
exchange completed
CR#14 = 3 refers to
exchange failed

END

Program Description:
z

Program of PLC_A:
(1) The received data are stored in CR#49 ~ CR#55.
(2) The data received every one second are written into D0 ~ D6.

z

Program of PLC_B:
(1) The data exchange will be executed every one second.
(2) Write the communication address of the destination PLC in CR#28, and DVPEN01-SL
will automatically detect by the previous setting that No. 1 IP is “192.168.0.4".
(3) Write the data of RTC into CR#29 ~ CR#355.
(4) Write “1” into CR#13 to start the data exchange.
(5) CR#14 = 2 refers to exchange completed. CR#14 = 3 refers to exchange failed.

z

For more instructions of ethernet communication module DVPEN01-SL, please refer to
DVP-PLC Application Manual: Special Modules Ⅱ

DVP-PLC Application Examples

16-5

16. Network Connection Design Examples
16.2

DeviceNet connection
DVPDNET

DVP28SV

RUN

STOP

Node Address :00

DeviceNet

RJ12

Node Address :02

RS485

VFD-B

DNA02

Control Purpose:
z

When M0 = ON, read the contenct of DNA02: Class 1>>Instance 1>>Attribute 1.

z

DVPDNET-SL settings:

Devices:

z

z

16-6

Parameter

Set value

Explanation

Node address

00

Baud rate

500kbps

Set communication speed of DVPDNET-SL and bus to 500kbps

Parameter

Set value

Explanation

Node address

02

Baud rate

500kbps

Set the node address of DVPDNET-SL to “00”.

DNA02 settings:

Set the node address of DNA02 to “02".
Set the communication speed of DNA02 and bus to 500kbps.

VFD-B parameter settings:
Parameter

Set value

Explanation

02-00

04

The main frequency is operated on RS-485 interface.

02-01

03

The operation commands are operated on the communication
interface. Operation by keys is valid.

09-00

01

Communication address of VFD-B: 01

09-01

03

Baud rate: 38,400

09-04

03

Modbus RTU mode. Data format <8, N, 2>

DVP-PLC Application Examples

16. Network Connection Design Examples

z

Explanations on devices:
PLC Devive

Explanation

Content

15 14 13 12 11 10 9

Request
message
editing area

Response
message
editing area

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

D6250

0101Hex

ReqID = 01Hex

Command = 01Hex

D6251

0005Hex

Port = 00Hex

Size = 05Hex

D6252

0E02Hex

Service Code = 0EHex

MAC ID = 02Hex

D6253

0001Hex

High bye ot Class ID = 00Hex

Low byte of Class ID = 01Hex

D6254

0001Hex

High byte of Instance ID =
00Hex

Low byte of Instance ID =
01Hex

D6255

0001Hex

N/A

Attribute ID = 01Hex

D6000

0101Hex

ReqID = 01Hex

Status = 01Hex

D6001

0002Hex

Port = 00Hex

Size = 02Hex

D6002

8E02Hex

Service Code = 8EHex

MAC ID = 02Hex

D6003

031FHex

High byte of Service Data =
03Hex

Low byte of Service Data =
1FHex

PLC device
M0

Function
When M0 = ON, DVPDNET-SL will send out request message

Control Program:
M1002
ZRST

D6000

D6031
Reset response message editing area
& request message editing area

ZRST

D6250

D6281

MOV

H0101

D6250

ReqID = 01, Command = 01

MOV

H0005

D6251

Port = 00, Size = 05

MOV

H0E02

D6252

Service Code = 0E, MAC ID = 02

MOV

H0100

D6253

Class ID to be read = 01

MOV

H0100

D6254

Instance ID to be read = 01

MOV

H0100

D6255

Attribute ID to be read = 01

M0

Program Description:
z

In the beginning of the program, clear the response message editing area and request
message editing area.

z

When M0 = ON, DVPDNET-SL will send out request message, reading Class 1>>Instance
1>> Attribute 1 of the target equipment (node address: 02). If the communication of explicit
message is successful, the slave will return with a response message.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

16-7

16. Network Connection Design Examples
z

When M0 = ON, DVPDNET-SL will only send out request message once. If you would like it
to send out request message again, you will have to change ReqID.

z

When the reading is successful, the message responded from the target equipment will be
stored in D6000 ~ D6003.

z

For more instructions of DeviceNet communication module DVPDNET-SL, please refer to
DVP-PLC Application Manual: Special Modules Ⅱ.

16-8

DVP-PLC Application Examples

16. Network Connection Design Examples

16.3

CANopen Connection
DVPCOPM

DVP28SV

CAN+

RUN

SHLD
CAN-

STOP

GND

Node 1

Master
CANopen
Node 2

RJ12

RS485
COA02

VFD-B

Control Purpose:
z

When M0 = ON, read the content of index 2021, sub index 4 (i.e. actual output value of AC
motor drive) in COA02.

Devices:
z

z

z

Settings of DVPCOPM-SL:
Parameter

Setting

Node address

01

Baud rate

1M bps

Explanation
Set the node address of DVPCOPM-SL to “01”.
Set the communication speed between DVPCOPM-SL and bus to
“1M bps”.

Settings of COA02:
Parameter

Setting

Node address

02

Baud rate

1M bps

Explanation
Set the node address of COA02 to “02”.
Set the communication speed between COA02 and bus to “1M
bps”.

Settings of VFD-B:
Parameter

Setting

02-00

04

The main frequency is operated by RS-485 interface.

03

The running command is operated by communication interface.
Operation by keys is valid.

01

Communication address of VFD-B: 01

02-01
09-00
DVP-PLC Application Examples

Explanation

16-9

16. Network Connection Design Examples

z

09-01

03

Baud rate: 38,400 bps

09-04

03

Modbus RTU mode, format <8, N, 2>

Explanation on devices:
PLC device

Explanation

content

15 14 13 12 11 10 9
SDO
request
message
editing area

SDO
response
message
editing area

8

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D6250

0101Hex

ReqID = 01 Hex

Command = 01 Hex

D6251

0004Hex

Reserved

Size = 04 Hex

D6252

0102Hex

Type = 01 Hex

MAC ID = 02 Hex

D6253

2021Hex

D6254

0004Hex

Reserved

Sub index = 04 Hex

D6000

0101Hex

ReqID = 01Hex

Status = 01 Hex

D6001

0006Hex

Reserved

Size = 06 Hex

D6002

4B02Hex

Type = 4B Hex

MAC ID = 02 Hex

D6003

2021Hex

D6004

0004Hex

Reserved

Sub index = 04 Hex

D6005

0100 Hex

Datum1 = 01 Hex

Datum0 = 00 Hex

High byte of index = 20 Hex Low byte of index = 21 Hex

High byte of index = 20 Hex Low byte of index = 21 Hex

0100Hex in D6005 refers to the actual output frequency of the AC motor drive is 2.56Hz.
PLC Device

Function

M0

When M0 = ON, CANopen master will send out SDO request
message

Control Program:
M1002
ZRST

D6000

D6031
Reset response message editing area
and request message editing area.

ZRST

D6250

D6281

MOV

H0101

D6250

ReqID = 01, Command = 01

MOV

H0004

D6251

Size = 04

MOV

H0102

D6252

Type = 01, MAC ID = 02

MOV

H2021

D6253

Index = 2021

MOV

H0004

D6254

Sub index = 04

M0

END

16-10

DVP-PLC Application Examples

16. Network Connection Design Examples

Program Description:
z

The program first reset the SDO request message editing area and SDO response message
editing area.

z

When M0 = ON, CANopen master will send out SDO request message and read the
contents in index 2021, sub index 4 of the target equipment (at node address 02). If the
communication is successful, the slave will return with the response message.

z

When M0 = ON, CANopen master will send out request message only once. If you would
like it to send out messages again, you will have to change the ReqID.

z

The messages returned from the target equipment are stored in D6000 ~ D6005.

z

For more instructions of CANopen communication module DVPCOPM-SL, please refer to
DVP-PLC Application Manual: Special Modules Ⅱ.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

16-11

16. Network Connection Design Examples

16.4

RTU-485 Connection
DVP28SV

RUN

STOP

28SV

DVP-02DA

DVP-04PT

DVP-04TC

DVP-04AD

DVP-16SP

DVP-08ST

RTU-485

RS485

COM2

RTU-485

DI/DO

AI/AO

Control Purpose:
z

The station No. of RTU-485 is 1. Write H’0001 into CR#6 of the 1st special module. Max
connectible special modules: 8; Max. DI/DO: 128 inputs and 128 outputs.

Devices:
z

Explanation on devices:
PLC Device

M1122

When M0 = ON, the master device will send out a request message to
RTU-485
Storing COM2(RS-485) communication protocal
Retaining COM2(RS-485) protocol. Change of D1120 is invalid when
M1120 = ON.
Sending request

M1127

Data receiving completed

M1129

Communication timeout

M1143

Selecting ASCII/RTU mode of COM2(RS-485). OFF: ASCII; ON: RTU

M0
D1120
M1120

z

Explanation on communication address:
Communication
address

Devices

H’1600 ~ H’1630

1st special module: CR0 ~ CR48

H’1640 ~ H’1670
H’1680 ~ H’16B0
H’16C0 ~ H’16F0
H’1700 ~ H’1730
H’1740 ~ H’1770

16-12

Function

Attribute

Data type Length
word

49

nd

word

49

rd

word

49

word

49

word

49

word

49

2 special module: CR0 ~ CR48
3 special module: CR0 ~ CR48

Please refer to the
4 special module: CR0 ~ CR48 CR attribute of
5th special module: CR0 ~ CR48 each special
module.
6th special module: CR0 ~ CR48
th

th

H’1780 ~ H’17B0

7 special module: CR0 ~ CR48

word

49

H’17C0 ~ H’17F0

8th special module: CR0 ~ CR48

word

49

DVP-PLC Application Examples

16. Network Connection Design Examples
Note:
Maximum 8 special modules are connectible to RTU-485. The first special module connected
is the nearest one on the right side of RTU-485.
Control Program:
z

The station No. of RTU-485 is “1”. Write “H’0001” into CR#6 of the 1st AI/AO special module.
M1002
MOV

H86

D1120

RST

M1143

SET

M1120

MOV

K300

D1129

SET

M1122

Sending request

MODWR

K1

Set the communication
protocal:
9600,7,E,1,ASCII

Retain communication settings

M0

Set communication
timeout: 300ms

M0
H1606

H0001

M1127

Write H0001
into CR#6 of the
1st special module

Process received data
RST

M1127

Reset M1127

M1129
Process communicaiton timeout
RST

M1129

M1140
Process communication error
M1141
RST

M1140

RST

M1141

END

Program Description:
z

Communication format should be set at the beginning of the program, and the protocal of
Master and slave should be the same: 9600,7,E,1,ASCII.

z

When M0 = ON, the sending request flag will be ON and the master device will send out a
request message to RTU-485 and write H’0001 into CR#6 of the 1st Ai/AO special module on
the right side of RTU-485.

z

For more instructions of communication module RTU-485, please refer to DVP-PLC
Application Manual: Special Modules Ⅱ.

DVP-PLC Application Examples

16-13

16. Network Connection Design Examples
MEMO

16-14

DVP-PLC Application Examples

17. Index

Index

„ Production Line Control
Auto
Manual

X0
X1

Clip
Transfer
Release

Conveyor A

Conveyor B

1.17 MC/MCR - Manual/Auto Control .............................................................................. 1-21
1.18 STL Manual/Auto Control ........................................................................................ 1-24
2.1 Product Mass Packaging ........................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Daily Production Record (16-bit Counting Up Latched Counter) ............................... 2-2
3.15 Auto Interruption Timer ............................................................................................ 3-25
9.1 ENCO/DECO - Encoding and Decoding.................................................................... 9-1
10.2 DHSCS - Cutting Machine Control .......................................................................... 10-3
10.3 DHSZ/DHSCR - Multi-segment Coater Control ....................................................... 10-4
10.7 PLSR - Servo Motor Acceleration/Deceleration Control .......................................... 10-11
11.1 Elementary Arithmetic for Integer and Floating Point............................................... 11-1
15.5 IST - Electroplating Process Auto Control ............................................................... 15-12
„

Production Line Control – detecting
Y0
X1
X0

1.1 Normally Closed Contact in Series Connection ........................................................ 1-1
8.2 SFTL - Defective Product Detect ............................................................................... 8-3
8.3 WSFL - Automatic Sorting Mixed Products................................................................ 8-5
10.5 PLSY - Production Line Control Program ................................................................ 10-7

DVP-PLC Application Examples

17-1

17. Index
„ Motor Control
X0

Y0

START

X2
STOP

Oil Pump Motor
Oil Pump Motor

X1
START

X3
STOP

Main Motor

Y1

Main Motor

1.9 SET/RST - Latched and Unlatched Circuit................................................................. 1-9
1.11 Conditional Control Circuit........................................................................................ 1-12
1.15 Forward/Reverse Control for the Three-Phase Asynchronous Motor ...................... 1-18
3.4 Sequential Delay Output (Starting 3 Motors Sequentially) ......................................... 3-4
3.8 Star-Delta Reduced Voltage Starter Control............................................................... 3-11
13.3 HOUR - Control of Switching Motors after a Long Time Running ............................ 13-6

„ Servo Motor Control
Pulse Output
Y10
C2
Y0
C0

X1
Stroke 1

PLS
COM SIGN

X4

X2

Stroke 2

X3

Forward / Reverse

Stroke 3

DVP12SC
Delta ASDA Servo

2.5 A B-phase Pulse High-speed Counter ....................................................................... 2-6
5.1 Recipe Setting by CJ Instruction ................................................................................ 5-1
10.7 PLSR - Servo Motor Acceleration/Deceleration Control........................................... 10-11
12.4 Communication between PLC and Delta ASD-A Series AC Servo Drive................. 12-14
12.5 Communication between PLC and Delta ASD-A Series AC Servo Drive................. 12-18
12.10 LINK between PLC, Delta AC Motor Drive and AC Servo Drive ............................ 12-34
14.1 Simple positioning Demonstration System of Delta ASDA AC Servo Drive ............. 14-1

„ AC Motor Drive Control
X2
X3
30Hz 40Hz
X4
X1
0Hz 50Hz
Frequency Selection
RS485

1# ACMD

2# ACMD

3# ACMD

4# ACMD

6.4 FMOV - Single Data Broadcasting ............................................................................. 6-5
12.1 Communication between PLC and Delta VFD-M Series AC Motor Drive ................ 12-5
12.2 Communication between PLC and Delta VFD-B Series AC Motor Drive ................. 12-8
17-2

DVP-PLC Application Examples

17. Index
12.3 Communication between PLC and Delta VFD-V Series AC Motor Drive ................ 12-11
12.10 LINK between PLC, Delta AC Motor Drive and AC Servo Drive ............................ 12-34
12.13 Communication between Delta PLC and Siemens MM420 Frequency Inverter.... 12-45
12.14 Communication between Delta PLC and Danfoss VLT6000 Series Adjustable Frequency Drive
.............................................................................................................................. 12-50

„ Positioning Control

7.2 INC/DEC - Fine Tuning by JOG Control .................................................................... 7-3
7.3 NEG - Displacement Reverse Control ....................................................................... 7-5
14.1 Simple positioning Demonstration System of Delta ASDA AC Servo Drive ............. 14-1
14.2 Draw DELTA LOGO by 2-axis Synchronous Motion ................................................ 14-6

„ Level Monitoring
Y10 Y11

X0

Y1
Y0
X1

3.6 Artificial Fishpond Water Level Monitoring System (Flashing Circuit)........................ 3-7
5.2 Reservoir Level Control ............................................................................................. 5-3
6.2 ZCP - Water Level Alarm Control............................................................................... 6-3
9.5 ANS/ANR - Level Monitoring Alarm System .............................................................. 9-7

„ Temperature Control
M aster PLC

Master ID
=K 10
PLC

RS-485

Slave1

Slave address
=K 1
DTA Temperature Controller

Slave2

Slave address
=K 2
DTB Temperature controller

9.7 SER - Room Temperature Monitoring........................................................................ 9-10
12.6 Communication between PLC and Delta DTA Temperature Controller ................... 12-22
DVP-PLC Application Examples

17-3

17. Index
12.7 Communication between PLC and Delta DTB Temperature Controller ................... 12-25
12.11 LINK between PLC, Delta DTA and DTB Temperature Controllers ........................ 12-38
15.6 FTC - Fuzzy Temperature Control of the Oven ........................................................ 15-18
15.7 PID - Oven Temperature Control (Auto-tuning for PID Temperature Control) .......... 15-22

„ Indicator Control
ON

Y13 Y12

Y11 Y10

X1

Y7
Y15

Y6

Y16
Y17

Y0

Y4
Y1

Y2

OFF

Y5

Y3

1.13 Last-in Priority Circuit ............................................................................................... 1-15
3.1 Delay OFF Program ................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Delay ON Program..................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Delay ON/OFF Program............................................................................................. 3-3
6.5 CML - Color Lights Flashing....................................................................................... 6-7
8.1 ROL/ROR - Neon Lamp Design................................................................................. 8-1

„ Material Mixing
Green
X3

Yellow

Blue

Y0

Y1

X2 Blue

Yellow X1

Color Selection

X0

1.16 Selective Execution of Programs ............................................................................. 1-19
3.10 Automatic Liquids Mixing Control System ................................................................ 3-15
3.11 Automatic Coffee Maker ........................................................................................... 3-17
4.2 Parameter Setting for Product Recipe ....................................................................... 4-3
6.1 CMP - Material Mixing Machine ................................................................................. 6-1
15.4 ABSD - Adding Materials in Different Intervals (Absolute Drum Sequencer) ........... 15-9

„ Data Processing
D
X
M
Y
C

File register
memory

Data register
memory

T
S

MEMW

MEMR

Write

Read

File register
PLC internal memory

17-4

Data register
memory

File register
memory

Data register
memory

DVP-PLC Application Examples

17. Index

9.2 SUM/BON - Checking and Counting the Number of “1” ............................................ 9-3
9.3 MEAN/SQR - Mean Value and Square Root ............................................................. 9-4
9.4 MEMR/MEMW - File Register Access ....................................................................... 9-5
9.6 SORT - Sorting Acquired Data................................................................................... 9-8
11.2 Elementary Arithmetic for Floating Point .................................................................. 11-4

„ Communication
Master PLC

Master address =K20

EH 2
Rs485 networ k

Slave1

Slave2

Slave addr ess
=K4

Slave address
=K3

Slave address
=K2

SA

Slave3

SX

SS

Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1 Communication between PLC and Delta VFD-M Series AC Motor Drive................ 12-5
12.2 Communication between PLC and Delta VFD-B Series AC Motor Drive ................ 12-8
12.3 Communication between PLC and Delta VFD-V Series AC Motor Drive ................ 12-11
12.4 Communication between PLC and Delta ASD-A Series AC Servo Drive ................ 12-14
12.5 Communication between PLC and Delta ASD-A Series AC Servo Drive ................ 12-18
12.6 Communication between PLC and Delta DTA Temperature Controller ................... 12-22
12.7 Communication between PLC and Delta DTB Temperature Controller ................... 12-25
12.8 PLC LINK 16 Slaves and Read/Write 16 Data (Word)............................................. 12-28
12.9 PLC LINK 32 Slaves and Read/Write 100 Data (Word)........................................... 12-31
12.10 LINK between PLC, Delta AC Motor Drive and AC Servo Drive ............................ 12-34
12.11 LINK between PLC, Delta DTA and DTB Temperature Controllers........................ 12-38
12.12 Controlling START/STOP of 2 DVP PLCs through Communication ...................... 12-41
12.13 Communication between Delta PLC and Siemens MM420 Frequency Inverter.... 12-45
12.14 Communication between Delta PLC and Danfoss VLT6000 Series Adjustable Frequency Drive
.............................................................................................................................. 12-50

DVP-PLC Application Examples

17-5

17. Index
„ Network Connection
DVP DN ET

DV P28 SV

RU N

STOP

Node Address :00

DeviceNet

RJ12

Node Address :02

RS485

VFD-B

DNA02

16.1 Ethernet Connection ................................................................................................ 16-1
16.2 DeviceNet Connection ............................................................................................. 16-6
16.3 CANopen Connection .............................................................................................. 16-9
16.4 RTU-485 Connection ............................................................................................... 16-12

„ Light Switch Control
X1

Y0

X0

1.2 Block in Parallel Connection ...................................................................................... 1-2
1.8 Common Latched Circuit and SET/RST Instructions Application............................... 1-8
1.10 Alternate Output Circuit (With Latched Function)..................................................... 1-10

„ Automatic Door Control
Y2/Y3

o
X6

n

X4

Open Close
X1
X0
Open Close
o
X2
X3

n

Y0/Y1

X7

3.9 Automatic Door Control .............................................................................................. 3-13
13.2 TRD/TZCP - Control of Warehouse Automatic Door................................................ 13-3

17-6

DVP-PLC Application Examples

17. Index
„ Real Time Calendar and Time Design Applications

Hour

Minute

Second

2.4 24-hour Clock Operated by 3 Counters ..................................................................... 2-5
13.1 TRD/TWR/TCMP - Office Bell Timing Control ......................................................... 13-1

„ Parking Lot Entry Control
Y1

Y0
X0

X1

1.6 Interlock Control Circuit ............................................................................................. 1-6
1.14 Entry/Exit Control of the Underground Car Park...................................................... 1-16

„ Traffic Lights Control
Vertical direction
Horizontal direction

3.17 Traffic Lights Control................................................................................................ 3-29
15.3 INCD - Traffic Lights Control (Incremental Drum Sequencer).................................. 15-6

„ Product Testing Device Control
X0
Y0

3.7 Burn-in Test System (Timing Extension).................................................................... 3-9
6.3 BMOV - Multiple History Data Backup....................................................................... 6-4

DVP-PLC Application Examples

17-7

17. Index
„ Alarm Control
X0
TOTALD
Yuan
TOTAL:
41: .41.2
2 Yuan
CHANGE: 8
: 8.8
Yuan
CHANGE
. 8Yuan

Y0~Y17

TOTAL: 88.00 Yuan
CHANGE : 33.2 Yuan

Y20~Y37

CHANGE : 12.00 Yuan

Y40~ Y57

5.3 Fire Alarm in the Office (Interruption Application)....................................................... 5-5
5.4 Auto Lock up System in the Supermarket (FOR ~ NEXT) ......................................... 5-7

„ Others
1.3 Rising-edge Pulse Output for One Scan Cycle .......................................................... 1-3
1.4 Falling-edge Pulse Output for One Scan Cycle ......................................................... 1-4
1.5 Latching Control Circuit.............................................................................................. 1-5
1.7 Automatic Parameter Initialization When Powered Up............................................... 1-7
1.12 First-in Priority Circuit............................................................................................... 1-13
2.3 Products Amount Calculation (32-bit Counting Up/Down Counter)............................ 2-4
3.5 Pulse-Width Modulation ............................................................................................. 3-6
3.12 Automatic Urinal Flushing Control Program ............................................................. 3-19
3.13 Performing Accumulative Function with Normal Timer............................................. 3-21
3.14 Performing Teaching Function with Normal Timer ................................................... 3-23
3.16 Interesting Fountain ................................................................................................. 3-27
4.1 Summation of Continuous D Registers ...................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Controlling Voltage Output of 2 DVP-04DA by 8 VRs (Variable Resistors) ................ 4-5
6.6 XCH - Exchanging the Upper and Lower 8 bits in a Register .................................... 6-8
6.7 DIP Switch Input and 7-segment Display Output ....................................................... 6-9
7.1 Accurate Pipe Flow Measurement ............................................................................. 7-1
8.4 SFWR/SFRD - Room Service Call Control ................................................................ 8-8
10.1 REF/REFF - DI/DO Refreshment and DI Filter Time Setting ................................... 10-1
10.4 SPD - Wheel Rotation Speed Measurement............................................................ 10-6
10.6 PWM - Sprayer Valve Control Program.................................................................... 10-9
15.1 ALT - Auto Blackboard Cleaner ................................................................................ 15-1
15.2 RAMP - Ramp Control of Crane............................................................................... 15-3

17-8

DVP-PLC Application Examples



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Modify Date                     : 2012:04:17 14:49:52+08:00
Create Date                     : 2012:04:17 14:49:52+08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2012:04:17 14:49:52+08:00
Creator Tool                    : CorelDRAW 版本 12.0
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : DVP-PLC Application Examples of Programming(CURVE).cdr
Creator                         : Delta
Document ID                     : uuid:e8897d5d-6116-46a4-b273-27bf0ec30817
Instance ID                     : uuid:4f9dbb5a-91c0-4057-9cb0-c6a77e52502d
Producer                        : Corel PDF Engine Version 1.0.0.536
Page Count                      : 267
Author                          : Delta
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu